Pioneer Network Card AVIC Z1 User Manual

Operation Manual  
HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER  
Notice to all users:  
This software requires that the navigation system is properly connected to your vehicle’s  
parking brake and depending on your vehicle, additional installation may be required. For  
more information, please contact your Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at  
(800) 421-1404.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Manual Overview  
This manual provides the important information you need to make full use of your new navigation sys-  
tem. The beginning sections outline the navigation system and describe its basic operation. The later  
sections describe the details of the navigation functions.  
Chapters 10 to 16 describe how to operate the AV functions. Please read these chapters when you use  
a disc in the built-in DVD drive or operate the Pioneer audio equipment connected to the navigation sys-  
tem.  
How to use this manual  
Be sure to read the following descriptions  
License Agreement (Page 5 to 8)  
This provides a licence agreement of this software. Be sure to read this before using the software.  
About the Data for the Map Database (Page 11)  
This provides the date when the Map Database was recorded.  
Copyright (Page 11)  
This provides the copyright of the Map Database.  
To find the operation procedure from what you want to do  
When you have decided what you want to do, you can find the page you need from the “Table of Con-  
tents”.  
To find the operation procedure from a menu name  
If you want to check the meaning of each item displayed on the screen, you will find the necessary page  
from the “Display Information” at the end of the manual.  
Glossary  
The section at the end of this manual provides a glossary. See the glossary to find the meaning of a  
term.  
Overview for each chapter  
Notes before Using the System  
For safety reasons, it is particularly important that you fully understand your naviga-  
tion system before using it. Be sure to read this chapter.  
1
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Please read this section if you want to operate the navigation system immediately.  
It will explain the basics of this system.  
2
This section describes the basic operations for navigation.  
How to Read Map Display  
This section describes how to read the map screen, and the method of changing map view or  
map scale.  
3
4
5
6
7
Modifying Map Configurations  
The behavior of your navigation system depends map display and guidance settings. If you  
need to change any of current settings, read the relevant section of this chapter.  
This section describes various ways to search for a destination, to edit the current route con-  
ditions, and operate the route during route guidance.  
Registering and Editing Locations  
You can register and edit the points on the map. This chapter describes how to register a  
home location, favorite location, or other location, and how to edit the registered location.  
Using Traffic Information  
When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected to the navigation system,  
the system can acquire traffic information and perform navigation using the traffic informa-  
tion. This chapter describes ways of viewing traffic icons that are displayed on the map and  
operation related traffic information.  
Using XM Tuner and Other Information  
When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected to the navigation system,  
variety of information other than traffic can be acquired. The navigation system can also reg-  
ister emergency information. This chapter describes ways of the information acquired with  
XM satellite radio, registration of emergency information.  
8
Using Hands-free Phoning  
When you are using a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology by connecting the Blue-  
tooth unit (sold separately) to the navigation system, you can operate your cellular phone  
hands-free. This chapter describes the operations related hands-free phoning.  
9
Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions  
The behavior of your navigation system depends on a number of general settings for naviga-  
tion functions. If you need to change any of the initial settings (default settings), read the rel-  
evant section of this chapter.  
10  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
This section describes how to use DVD-Videos, CDs, MP3 discs and the radio.  
11  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the AV Source (Music Library)  
You can record a music CD to the hard disk drive in the navigation system. This chapter  
describes recording music and playing back the recorded music.  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)  
This chapter describes the audio source operation that can be used when XM satellite radio  
tuner or SIRIUS satellite radio tuner are connected.  
Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod, TV)  
This chapter describes the audio source operation that can be used when Pioneer audio  
equipment featuring IP-BUS (Multi-CD player, iPod adapter, TV tuner) is connected.  
Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)  
This chapter describes the audio source operation that can be used when an AV equipment  
with RCA connector (AV input), future Pioneer devices (external unit ), and an auxiliary  
equipment (AUX) are connected.  
Customizing the Audio Setting Related with Audio Visual  
Using the audio source, various audio-visual settings are available to suit your tastes. This  
chapter describes how to change the settings.  
16  
17  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
This section describes navigation operations, such as searching the destination and per-  
forming audio operations by voice.  
Please read the appendix to learn more about your navigation system and information such  
as the availability of after-care. Please see “Display Information” at the end of this manual  
to check the detail for each item on the menu.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Terminology  
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read the following information about the conventions used in  
this manual. They will help you greatly as you learn how to use your new equipment.  
• Hardware buttons on your navigation system are described in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:  
e.g.)  
MAP button, MENU button.  
• Items in the different menus or touch keys available on the screen are described in Parenthesis [ ]  
and bold:  
e.g.)  
[Destination], [Settings].  
• Extra information, alternative usages, and other notes are presented like this:  
e.g.)  
Touch keys which are not available at this time are grayed out.  
• The references have relations with that description are indicated like this:  
e.g.)  
Setting the Route Options Page 32  
The tab on the right corner indicates to which operation the description is related. Nav-  
igation operation or AV (Audio Visual) source operation.  
For example, “NAVI” indicates that the description is related to the operation for navi-  
gation control.  
“NAVI/AV” indicates that the description is related to both operation for navigation  
control and AV control.  
About the definition of terminology  
“Front Display” and “Rear Display”  
In this manual, the screen that is attached to the body of this navigation unit will be referred to as the  
“Front Display”. Any additional optional screen that is purchased for use in conjunction with this navi-  
gation unit will be referred to as the “Rear Display”.  
Video image  
“Video image” in this manual indicates the moving image from DVD-Video in the built-in DVD drive or  
from the equipment that is connected to this product with AV-BUS or RCA cable, such as a TV tuner or  
general-purpose AV equipment.  
Color difference of the map display between day and night  
Night display  
The examples in this manual are illustrated using the daytime display. When driving at night, the colors  
you see may differ from those shown.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
copyrighted and may not be copied, even if modi-  
fied or merged with other products. You shall not  
alter or remove any copyright notice or propri-  
etary legend contained in or on the Software.  
You may transfer all of your license rights in the  
Software, the related documentation and a copy  
of this License Agreement to another party, pro-  
vided that the party reads and agrees to accept  
the terms and conditions of this License Agree-  
ment.  
License Agreement  
PIONEER AVIC-Z1 - for U.S.A.  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU,  
AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER ELECTRON-  
ICS (USA) INC. ([PIONEER]). PLEASE READ THE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT  
CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE  
INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY  
USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIO-  
NEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND  
BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE  
SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED  
BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER(S) ([SUPPLIERS]),  
AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-  
ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’ SEPARATE TERMS,  
WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT  
(Refer to page 9). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH  
ALL OF THESE TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE  
PIONEER PRODUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFT-  
WARE, AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN  
FIVE (5) DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS,  
TO THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM  
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF THE  
SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR  
CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREEMENT.  
2. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY  
The Software and related documentation are pro-  
vided to you [AS IS]. PIONEER AND ITS LICEN-  
SOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3,  
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be collectively  
referred to as [Pioneer]) MAKES AND YOU  
RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE,  
WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND ALL  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-  
NESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR  
THE SOFTWARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED.  
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLU-  
SION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The Software is  
complex and may contain some nonconformities,  
defects or errors. Pioneer does not warrant that  
the Software will meet your needs or expecta-  
tions, that operation of the Software will be error  
free or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities  
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer  
does not make any representations or warranties  
regarding the use or results of the use of the Soft-  
ware in terms of its accuracy, reliability or other-  
wise.  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE  
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non  
exclusive license to use the software installed on  
the Pioneer products (the [Software]) and the  
related documentation solely for your own per-  
sonal use or for internal use by your business,  
only on such Pioneer products.  
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,  
port, modify or make derivative works of the Soft-  
ware. You shall not loan, rent, disclose, publish,  
sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or other-  
wise transfer the Software or use it in any manner  
not expressly authorized by this agreement. You  
shall not derive or attempt to derive the source  
code or structure of all or any portion of the Soft-  
ware by reverse engineering, disassembly,  
decompilation, or any other means. You shall not  
use the Software to operate a service bureau or  
for any other use involving the processing of data  
for other persons or entities.  
3. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY  
YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COM-  
PENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES,  
LOST PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR  
BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR  
COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY  
BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAM-  
AGES) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR  
INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIO-  
NEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR  
SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD  
OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES  
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-  
right, trade secret, patent and other proprietary  
ownership rights in the Software. The Software is  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVID-  
UALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING  
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT,  
BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT  
LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER  
TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER  
OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS  
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON  
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR  
INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S  
LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT  
(50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE  
ENCLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.  
6. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS  
If the Software is being acquired by or on behalf  
of the United States government or any other  
entity seeking or applying rights similar to those  
customarily claimed by the United States govern-  
ment, the Data is licensed with [Limited Rights.]  
Utilization of the Software is subject to the  
restrictions specified in the [Rights in Technical  
Data] clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or the  
equivalent clause for non-defense agencies. Pio-  
neer Electronics (USA) Inc., 2265 East220th  
Street, Long Beach, CA 90810.  
7. MISCELLANEOUS  
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limita-  
tion of incidental or consequential damages, so  
the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to  
you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of lia-  
bility shall not be applicable to the extent that  
they are prohibited by any applicable federal,  
state or local law which provides that such a dis-  
claimer or limitation cannot be waived or pre-  
empted.  
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer  
and you regarding its subject matter. No change  
in this Agreement shall be effective unless  
agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer retailers  
do not have the authority to change this Agree-  
ment. This Agreement shall be governed by and  
construed in accordance with the internal laws of  
the State of California. If any provision of this  
Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable,  
the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall  
remain in full force and effect.  
4. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES  
You agree and certify that neither the Software  
nor any other technical data received from Pio-  
neer, nor the direct product thereof, will be  
exported outside the United States except as  
authorized and as permitted by the laws and reg-  
ulations of the United States. If the Software has  
been rightfully obtained by you outside of the  
United States, you agree that you will not re-  
export the Software nor any other technical data  
received from Pioneer, nor the direct product  
thereof, except as permitted by the laws and reg-  
ulations of the United States and the laws and  
regulations of the jurisdiction in which you  
obtained the Software.  
5. TERMINATION  
This Agreement is effective until terminated. You  
may terminate it at any time by destroying the  
Software. The Agreement also will terminate if  
you do not comply with any terms or conditions of  
this Agreement. Upon such termination, you  
agree to destroy the Software.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
fied or merged with other products. You shall not  
alter or remove any copyright notice or propri-  
etary legend contained in or on the Software.  
You may transfer all of your license rights in the  
Software, the related documentation and a copy  
of this License Agreement to another party, pro-  
vided that the party reads and agrees to accept  
the terms and conditions of this License Agree-  
ment.  
PIONEER AVIC-Z1 - for Canada  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU,  
AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER ELECTRON-  
ICS OF CANADA, INC. ([PIONEER]). PLEASE  
READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS  
AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE  
SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER  
PRODUCTS. BY USING THE SOFTWARE  
INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU  
AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS  
AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A  
DATABASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUP-  
PLIER(S) ([SUPPLIERS]), AND YOUR USE OF  
THE DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLI-  
ERS’ SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE  
2. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY  
The Software and related documentation are pro-  
vided to you [AS IS]. PIONEER AND ITS LICEN-  
SOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3,  
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be collectively  
referred to as [Pioneer]) MAKES AND YOU  
RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE,  
WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND ALL  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-  
NESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR  
THE SOFTWARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED.  
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLU-  
SION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The Software is  
complex and may contain some nonconformities,  
defects or errors. Pioneer does not warrant that  
the Software will meet your needs or expecta-  
tions, that operation of the Software will be error-  
free or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities  
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer  
does not make any representations or warranties  
regarding the use or results of the use of the Soft-  
ware in terms of its accuracy, reliability or other-  
wise.  
ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page  
9). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE  
TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PROD-  
UCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY  
WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS OF  
RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE AUTHO-  
RIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU  
PURCHASED THEM. USE OF THE SOFTWARE  
SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO  
THE LICENSE AGREEMENT.  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE  
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, nonex-  
clusive license to use the software installed on  
the Pioneer products (the [Software]) and the  
related documentation solely for your own per-  
sonal use or for internal use by your business,  
only on such Pioneer products.  
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,  
port, modify or make derivative works of the Soft-  
ware. You shall not loan, rent, disclose, publish,  
sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or other-  
wise transfer the Software or use it in any manner  
not expressly authorized by this agreement. You  
shall not derive, or attempt to derive, the source  
code or structure of all or any portion of the Soft-  
ware by reverse engineering, disassembly,  
decompilation, or any other means. You shall not  
use the Software to operate a service bureau or  
for any other use involving the processing of data  
for other persons or entities.  
3. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY  
YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COM-  
PENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES,  
LOST PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR  
BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR  
COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY  
BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAM-  
AGES) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR  
INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIO-  
NEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR  
SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD  
OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES  
TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVID-  
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-  
right, trade secret, patent and other proprietary  
ownership rights in the Software. The Software is  
copyrighted and may not be copied, even if modi-  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING  
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT,  
BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT  
LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER  
TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER  
OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS  
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON  
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR  
INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S  
LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT  
(50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE  
ENCLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.  
6. MISCELLANEOUS  
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer  
and you regarding its subject matter. No change  
in this Agreement shall be effective unless  
agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer retailers  
do not have the authority to change this Agree-  
ment. This Agreement shall be governed by and  
construed in accordance with the internal laws of  
the Province of Ontario and the federal laws of  
Canada applicable therein. If any provision of this  
Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable,  
the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall  
remain in full force and effect.  
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limita-  
tion of incidental or consequential damages, so  
the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to  
you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of lia-  
bility shall not be applicable to the extent that  
they are prohibited by any applicable federal,  
state or local law which provides that such a dis-  
claimer or limitation cannot be waived or pre-  
empted.  
4. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES  
You agree and certify that neither the Software  
nor any other technical data received from Pio-  
neer, nor the direct product thereof, will be  
exported outside Canada except as authorized  
and as permitted by the laws and regulations of  
Canada. If the Software has been rightfully  
obtained by you outside of Canada, you agree  
that you will not re-export the Software nor any  
other technical data received from Pioneer, nor  
the direct product thereof, except as permitted by  
the laws and regulations of Canada and the laws  
and regulations of the jurisdiction in which you  
obtained the Software.  
5. TERMINATION  
This Agreement is effective until terminated. You  
may terminate it at any time by destroying the  
Software. The Agreement also will terminate if  
you do not comply with any terms or conditions of  
this Agreement. Upon such termination, you  
agree to destroy the Software.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PLIERS DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE DATA  
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT  
THE OPERATION OF THE DATA WILL BE UNIN-  
TERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. NO ORAL OR  
WRITTEN ADVICE GIVEN BY TELE ATLAS, ITS  
LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS OR ANY OF THEIR  
RESPECTIVE EMPLOYEES CREATES A WAR-  
RANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASES TELE  
ATLAS’, ITS LICENSORS OR SUPPLIERS LIABIL-  
ITY AND YOU MAY NOT RELY ON ANY SUCH  
INFORMATION OR ADVICE. THIS DISCLAIMER  
IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDITION OF THIS AGREE-  
MENT AND YOU ACCEPT THE DATA ON THIS  
BASIS.  
Terms and Conditions for the  
Tele Atlas Data  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE [AGREE-  
MENT]) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND  
TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. ([Tele  
Atlas]). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE  
ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS AND  
CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.  
1. Grant of License.  
Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable, non-  
exclusive license to use the map data and busi-  
ness points of interest information (the [POIs]),  
(together, the [Data]) contained on hard disk  
drive, solely for personal, non-commercial use  
and not to operate a service bureau or for any  
other use involving the processing of data of  
other persons or entities. You may make one (1)  
copy of the Data for archival or backup purposes  
only but you may not otherwise copy, reproduce,  
modify, make derivative works, derive the struc-  
ture of or reverse engineer the Data. The Data  
contains confidential and proprietary information  
and materials, and may contain trade secrets, so  
you agree to hold the Data in confidence and in  
trust and not to disclose the Data or any portions  
in any form, including by renting, leasing, pub-  
lishing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring the  
Data to any third party. You are prohibited from  
using the POIs (i) to create mailing lists or (ii) for  
other such similar uses.  
4. Limitation of Liability.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL TELE ATLAS’, ITS LICEN-  
SORS’ OR SUPPLIER’ AGGREGATE LIABILITY  
FOR ALL MATTERS ARISING OUT OF THE SUB-  
JECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT, WHETHER  
IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, EXCEED  
THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR YOUR COPY OF  
THE TELE ATLAS DATA. TELE ATLAS, ITS LICEN-  
SORS AND SUPPLIERS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE  
IN ANY MATTER TO YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL,  
INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS  
OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUP-  
TION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND  
THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT  
OR THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
DATA, EVEN IF TELE ATLAS, ITS LICENSORS OR  
SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POS-  
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
2. Ownership.  
The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its  
licensors and they retain all ownership rights in  
the Data. You agree not to alter, remove, obliter-  
ate, or obscure any copyright notice or proprie-  
tary legend contained in or on the Data.  
5. Termination.  
This Agreement will terminate immediately and  
automatically, without notice, if you breach any  
term of this Agreement. You agree that in the  
event of termination of the Agreement, you shall  
return the Data (including all documentation and  
all copies) to Tele Atlas and its suppliers.  
3. Warranty Disclaimer.  
THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN [AS IS] AND  
[WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS] AND TELE ATLAS, ITS  
LICENSORS, AND ITS LICENSED DISTRIBUTORS  
AND SUPPLIERS (COLLECTIVELY, [SUPPLIERS])  
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRAN-  
TIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY,  
EFFECTIVENESS, COMPLETENESS, ACCURACY,  
TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-  
POSE. TELE ATLAS, ITS LICENSORS AND SUP-  
6. Indemnity.  
You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Tele  
Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers (including  
their respective licensors, suppliers, assignees,  
subsidiaries, affiliated companies, and the  
respective officers, directors, employees, share-  
holders, agents and representatives) free and  
harmless from and against any liability, loss,  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
injury (including injuries resulting in death),  
demand, action, cost, expense, or claim of any  
kind or character, including but not limited to  
attorney’s fees, arising out of or in connection  
with any use or possession by you of the Data.  
RAL RESOURCES, TELE ATLAS OR ITS  
LICENSORS AND EMPLOYEES CREATES A  
WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASES HER  
MAJESTY THE QUEEN AND THE MINISTER OF  
NATURAL RESOURCES LIABILITY AND YOU  
MAY NOT RELY ON ANY SUCH INFORMATION  
OR ADVICE.  
7. U.S. Government Rights.  
If you are an agency, department, or other entity  
of the United States Government, or funded in  
whole or in part by the United States Govern-  
ment, then use, duplication, reproduction,  
release, modification, disclosure or transfer of  
this commercial product and accompanying doc-  
umentation, is restricted in accordance with FAR  
12.212 and DFARS 227.7202, and by a license  
agreement. Contractor/manufacturer is Tele  
Atlas North America, Inc., 11 Lafayette Street,  
Lebanon, NH 03766, (603) 643-0330. The Data is  
©1984-2003 by Tele Atlas N.V. and Tele Atlas  
North America, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. For  
purpose of any public disclosure provision under  
any federal, state or local law, it is agreed that the  
Data is a trade secret and a proprietary commer-  
cial product and not subject to disclosure.  
b. Disclaimer of Liability.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LICENSORS,  
INCLUDING HER MAJESTY THE QUEEN IN  
RIGHT OF CANADA, THE MINISTER OF NATU-  
RAL RESOURCES OR THEIR RESPECTIVE  
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS (THE  
[LICENSORS]), BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR MAT-  
TERS ARISING OUT OF THE SUBJECT MATTER  
OF THE AGREEMENTS, WHETHER IN CON-  
TRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE.  
THE LICENSORS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO  
YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSE-  
QUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSI-  
NESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,  
LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE  
LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE AGREEMENT OR  
THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE DATA,  
EVEN IF THEY HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
8. Additional Provisions with respect to  
Canadian Data only.  
a. Warranty Disclaimer.  
c. Indemnification by You.  
The Data may include the data of licensors,  
including Her Majesty the Queen in Right of  
Canada. Such Data is provided on an [AS IS]  
AND [WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS] and the licen-  
sors, including HER MAJESTY THE QUEEN  
AND THE MINISTER OF NATURAL  
You shall indemnify and hold harmless the  
licensors, including Her Majesty the Queen in  
Right of Canada, the Minister of Natural  
Resources and their respective officers,  
employees and agents, from and against any  
claim, demand or action, irrespective of the  
nature of the claim, demand or action alleging  
loss, costs, damages, expenses, or injury  
(including injury from death) resulting from  
your authorized or unauthorized use, posses-  
sion, modification, or alteration of the Data.  
RESOURCES EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGE-  
MENT, MERCHANTABILITY, QUALITY, EFFEC-  
TIVENESS, COMPLETENESS, ACCURACY,  
TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-  
POSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY  
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA PROD-  
UCT RESTS WITH YOU. HER MAJESTY THE  
QUEEN AND THE MINISTER OF NATURAL  
RESOURCES DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE  
DATA WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR  
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE DATA WILL BE  
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. NO ORAL  
OR WRITTEN ADVICE GIVEN BY HER MAJ-  
ESTY THE QUEEN, THE MINISTER OF NATU-  
9. Miscellaneous.  
This is the exclusive and complete Agreement  
between Tele Atlas and you regarding its subject  
matter. Nothing in this Agreement shall create a  
joint venture, partnership or principal-agent rela-  
tionship between Tele Atlas and you. The internal  
laws of California shall govern this Agreement  
and you consent to the jurisdiction of the North-  
ern District of California or the State of California  
for the County of Santa Clara. Sections 2 - 4 and 7  
- 11 shall survive the expiration or termination of  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
this Agreement. This Agreement may be  
About the Data for the Map  
Database  
amended, altered, or modified only by Tele Atlas.  
You may not assign any part of this Agreement  
without Tele Atlas’ prior written consent. You  
acknowledge and understand that the Data may  
be subject to restrictions on exportation and  
agree to comply with any applicable export laws.  
In the event that any provision or part of a provi-  
sion of this Agreement is determined to be  
invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, such provision  
or part thereof shall be stricken from this Agree-  
ment and the remainder of this Agreement shall  
be valid, legal, and enforceable to the maximum  
extent possible. Any notice under this Agreement  
shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas North  
America, Inc., Attention Contracts Department,  
11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766 USA.  
• This database was developed and recorded up  
to April 2005. Changes to streets/highways  
made after that time may not be reflected in  
this database.  
• It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use  
any part or the whole of this map in any form  
without permission from the copyright owner.  
• If the local traffic regulations or conditions  
deviate from this data, follow the local traffic  
regulations (such as signs, indications, etc.)  
and conditions (such as construction, weather,  
etc.).  
• The traffic regulation data used in the map  
database applies only to standard sized pas-  
senger vehicles. Note that regulations for  
larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other non-  
standard vehicles are not included in the data-  
base.  
Copyright  
©1984-2006 Tele Atlas North America, Inc. All Rights  
Reserved.  
Data by Info USA ©2006 All Rights Reserved.  
Canadian Data © 2006 DMTI Spatial Inc., its licensors,  
and Tele Atlas North America, Inc. Portions of Canadian  
map data are reproduced under license from Her Maj-  
esty the Queen in Right of Canada with permission from  
Natural Resource Canada, The Queen in Right of Mani-  
toba, and other third party suppliers.  
© 2006 INCREMENT P CORP. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table of Contents  
Map 49  
Night 49  
Screen 49  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Telephone Number 55  
Your Favorite Location 55  
Selecting Destination from the Destination Histo-  
ry and Address Book 56  
Modifying the General Settings for  
Navigation Functions  
Phone 91  
location 59  
Location 96  
Using XM Tuner and Other Informa-  
tion  
Other Information 73  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD  
Drive and Radio)  
Tuner 75  
Checking the information registered as Emer-  
gency Info 75  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®,  
TV)  
Using the AV Source (Music Li-  
brary)  
Using the AV Source (AV, EXT,  
AUX)  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customizing the Audio Setting re-  
lated with Audio Visual  
Factory Settings 175  
Panels (Touch Panel Calibration) 178  
Data 181  
Errors 181  
Operating Your Navigation System  
with Voice  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Before Using the System  
Do not operate this navigation system (or the  
rear view camera option if purchased) if doing  
so will divert your attention in any way from  
the safe operation of your vehicle. Always  
observe safe driving rules and follow all exist-  
ing traffic regulations. If you experience diffi-  
culty in operating the system or reading the  
display, park your vehicle in a safe location  
and apply the parking brake before making  
the necessary adjustments.  
Important Safety Information  
Before using your navigation system, be sure to  
read and fully understand the following safety  
information:  
• Do not attempt to install or service your  
navigation system by yourself. Installation  
or servicing of the navigation system by  
persons without training and experience in  
electronic equipment and automotive  
accessories may be dangerous and could  
expose you to the risk of electric shock or  
other hazards.  
Never allow others to use the system unless  
they have read and understood the operating  
instructions.  
Never use this navigation system to route to  
hospitals, police stations, or similar facilities  
in an emergency. Stop using any functions  
relating to the hands-free phone and please  
call 911.  
• When a route is calculated, the route and  
voice guidance for the route is automati-  
cally set. Also, for day or time traffic regu-  
lations, only information about traffic  
regulations at the time when the route was  
calculated is shown. One-way streets and  
street closures may not be taken into con-  
sideration. For example, if a street is open  
during the morning only, but you arrive  
later, it would be against the traffic regula-  
tions so you cannot drive along the set  
route. When driving, please follow the  
actual traffic signs. Also, the system may  
not know some traffic regulations.  
Route and guidance information displayed by  
this equipment is for reference purposes only.  
It may not accurately reflect the latest permis-  
sible routes, road conditions, one way streets,  
road closures, or traffic restrictions.  
Traffic restrictions and advisories currently in  
force should always take precedence over  
guidance given by the navigation system.  
Always obey current traffic restrictions, even if  
the navigation system provides contrary  
advice.  
Read the entire manual before operating this  
Failure to set correct information about the  
local time may result in the navigation system  
providing improper routing and guidance  
instructions.  
navigation system.  
The navigation features of your navigation sys-  
tem (and rear view camera option if pur-  
chased) are intended solely as an aid to you in  
the operation of your vehicle. It is not a substi-  
tute for your attentiveness, judgment, and  
care when driving.  
Never set the volume of your navigation sys-  
tem so high that you cannot hear outside traf-  
fic and emergency vehicles.  
To promote safety, certain functions are dis-  
abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or the  
parking brake is applied.  
The data encoded in the hard disk drive for the  
navigation system is the intellectual property  
of the provider, and the provider is responsible  
for such content.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Keep this manual handy as a reference for  
Additional Safety Information  
To ensure safe driving  
operating procedures and safety information.  
Pay close attention to all warnings in this  
manual and follow the instructions carefully.  
Parking brake interlock  
Do not install this navigation system where it  
may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) impair  
the performance of any of the vehicle’s operat-  
ing systems or safety features, including air  
bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the  
driver’s ability to safely operate the vehicle.  
Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD video  
and certain touch key operation) offered by this  
navigation system could be dangerous and/or  
unlawful if used while driving. To prevent such  
functions from being used while the vehicle is in  
motion, there is an interlock system that senses  
when the parking brake is set and when the vehi-  
cle is moving. If you attempt to use the functions  
described above while driving, they will become  
disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place,  
and apply the parking brake. Please keep the  
brake pedal pushed down before releasing the  
parking brake.  
Please remember to wear your seat belt at all  
times while operating your vehicle. If you are  
ever in an accident, your injuries can be con-  
siderably more severe if your seat belt is not  
properly buckled.  
Never use headphones while driving.  
• To avoid the risk of damage and injury and  
the potential violation of applicable laws,  
the navigation system is not for use with a  
“Video image” that is visible to the driver.  
• In some countries or states the viewing of  
“Video image” on a display inside a vehi-  
cle even by persons other than the driver  
may be illegal. Where such regulations  
apply, they must be obeyed.  
• When applying the parking brake in order  
to view “Video image” or to enable other  
functions offered by the navigation sys-  
tem, park your vehicle in a safe place, and  
keep the brake pedal pushed down before  
releasing the parking brake if the vehicle  
is parked on a hill or otherwise might  
move when releasing the parking brake.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Features (Characteristics of this  
software)  
• Accuracy/performance of interlock may be  
impacted by such factors as GPS signal  
detection, speed pulse wire connectivity,  
and driving habits or conditions of the  
place where the vehicle is parked.  
• It is strongly suggested that the speed  
pulse wire be connected for accuracy of  
navigation and better performance of  
interlock.  
Touch panel key operation  
It is possible to operate the navigation function  
and the Audio function by using touch panel key.  
Variety of View Modes  
Various types of screen display can be selected  
for navigation guidance.  
– [Map Mode], [Mixed Mode], [Route View],  
[Driver’s View], and [Twin Map View]  
The split screen mode is also available.  
– [Rear View] (Rear view camera screen and Nav-  
igation map screen)  
• If the speed pulse wire is unavailable for  
some reason, it is recommended that the  
pulse generator ND-PG1 (sold separately)  
be used.  
– [Vehicle Dynamics]  
When you attempt to watch “Video image”s while  
driving, the warning “Viewing of front seat  
video source while driving is strictly prohib-  
ited.” will appear on the screen. To watch “Video  
image”s on this display, stop the vehicle in a safe  
place, and apply the parking brake. Please keep  
the brake pedal pushed down before releasing  
the parking brake.  
You can also display information on vehicle  
speed, acceleration, and voltage, etc.  
• The rear view mode is to use the naviga-  
tion system as an aid to keep an eye on the  
trailers, or while backing up. Do not use  
this function for entertainment purposes.  
About rear view camera and [Rear  
View] mode  
With an optional rear view camera, you are able  
to use the navigation system as an aid to keep an  
eye on trailers, or backing into a tight parking  
spot.  
Wide Variety of Facility Information for  
Points of Interest (POI) Search  
You can search your destination from all areas.  
– Approximately 11 million POIs are included in  
this database as of January 2005.  
– Some POI information may not be accurate or  
may become inaccurate through the passage of  
time. Please directly contact the POI to verify the  
accuracy of the information about the POI which  
appears in this database. POI information is sub-  
ject to change without notice.  
• SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR  
REVERSED.  
• USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR  
MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA.  
OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY  
OR DAMAGE.  
Auto Reroute Function  
If you deviate from the set route, the system will  
re-calculate the route from that point so that you  
remain on track to the destination.  
This function may not work in certain areas.  
Auto CD title and MP3 file listing  
Title lists will automatically be displayed when a  
CD TEXT or MP3 disc is played. This system pro-  
vides easy-to-operate audio functions that allow  
playback simply by selecting an item from the  
list.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the  
Data communication function with XM  
tuner  
accuracy of the information transmitted.  
If you connect the optional XM tuner (GEX-  
P10XMT) to the navigation system, you can use  
traffic information as a part of the navigation  
function. Separate subscription for XM NavTraffic  
required.  
Pioneer does not bear responsibility for  
changes to information services provided by  
XM, such as cancellation of the services or  
subscription update.  
Traffic information is not taken into account  
when calculating estimated time of arrival  
time or travel time for your destination.  
In addition, if you subscribe to XM Audio ser-  
vices, you can utilize the XM display which fea-  
tures station logos and category icons, improving  
your XM Audio experience.  
Notes for Hard disk drive  
Using XM NavTraffic Information Page 67  
Listening to XM Satellite Radio Page 127  
Recording equipment and copy-  
right  
The icon of each broadcast station is con-  
tained in the hard disk drive based on the data  
provided by XM Satellite Radio as of Decem-  
ber 2005.  
Recording equipment should be used only for  
lawful copying and you are advised to check care-  
fully what is lawful copying in the country in  
which you are making a copy. Copying of copy-  
right material such as films or music is unlawful  
unless permitted by a legal exception or con-  
sented to by the right owners.  
Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio in  
the lineup or icon of the broadcast station in  
the future may not be supported by the navi-  
gation system, and may cause the unit not to  
display the correct icons.  
About writing data to the hard  
disk drive at low temperature  
About XM NavTraffic Service  
and Pioneer Navigation  
Writing to the hard disk drive such as recording  
music to the music library may be disabled when  
the navigation system detects abnormally low  
temperatures inside the vehicle. Functionality will  
become available once the temperature inside  
the vehicle returns to normal.  
XM NavTraffic subscription is required and is  
available only in select markets. Check  
www.xmnavtraffic.com for service availability,  
pricing information, and other details. The  
availability of XM NavTraffic data depends on  
the ability of the antenna to receive a signal.  
The signal may be unavailable if obstructed  
(e.g., by buildings, mountains, trees, bridges,  
bad weather, etc.). XM NavTraffic data also  
may be unavailable or not current if the origi-  
nal data source is not providing data (e.g.,  
scheduled or unscheduled downtime) or has  
not been updated itself or if there is a time lag  
between the time the original data source is  
updated and when you receive the updated  
XM NavTraffic data.  
When recording please pay  
attention to these points;  
• Pioneer does not compensate for the contents  
that could not be recorded or any loss of  
recorded data due to a malfunction or failure of  
the navigation system.  
• The data recorded on the navigation system is  
not allowed to be used without a permission  
from its right holder under copyright law  
except for personal entertainment.  
Depending on the amount of data being trans-  
mitted in your area, it may take several min-  
utes to display all of the available data.  
• Make sure to check the recording operation  
before recording and check the recorded con-  
tents after recording.  
The information content depends on the infor-  
mation provided by XM NavTraffic Service,  
including data refresh and availability timing.  
• Recording is not guaranteed for all CDs.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
About the data saved or  
recorded by the customer  
Product registration  
Visit us at the following site:  
• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-  
tion system by the customer cannot be  
extracted from the navigation system, and  
those service cannot be accepted.  
1. Register your product. We will keep the details  
of your purchase on file to help you refer to this  
information in the event of an insurance claim  
such as loss or theft.  
• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-  
tion system by the customer cannot be guaran-  
teed during repair or service. Lost data that  
was saved or recorded by the customer is not  
guaranteed.  
• Due to copyrights, the music data recorded  
into the Music Library cannot be backed up  
during repair or service.  
2. Receive updates on the latest products and  
technologies.  
3. Download owner’s manuals, order product cat-  
alogues, research new products, and much  
more.  
4. Receive notices of software upgrades and soft-  
ware updates.  
Failure to operate  
Should the navigation system fail to operate prop-  
erly, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized  
Pioneer service facility.  
After-sales service for Pioneer  
products  
Please contact the dealer or distributor from  
which you purchased the product for after-sales  
service (including warranty conditions) or any  
other information. In case the necessary infor-  
mation is not available, please contact the com-  
panies listed below.  
Please do not ship your product to the compa-  
nies at the addresses listed below for repair with-  
out making advance contact.  
CANADA  
U.S.A  
cs of  
Pioneer Electroni  
Canada, Inc.  
CUSTOMER  
Pioneer Electronics  
(USA) Inc.  
-
CUSTOMER SUP  
PORT DIVISION  
P.O. Box 1760  
Long Beach, CA  
90801-1760  
SATISFACTION  
DEPARTMENT  
300 Allstate Parkway  
o
Markham, Ontari  
L3R OP2  
800-421-1404  
1-877-283-5901  
For warranty information, please see the Limited  
Warranty sheet included with your product.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Basic Operation  
4 Assign a destination by using the touch  
panel key and beginning route guidance,  
or operate the Audio source.  
Flow from Startup to Termina-  
tion  
At first, please confirm the positions of the follow-  
ing features using the “Hardware Manual”.  
MAP button  
MENU button  
AV button  
OPEN CLOSE button  
1 Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After some time, the navigation opening  
screen comes on for a few seconds. Then, a  
message screen is displayed.  
Touch keys which are not available at this  
time are grayed out.  
Specifying the address and searching the  
destination Page 25  
Searching the destination by map ➞  
Page 43  
2 Check the details of the cautionary mes-  
sage and touch [OK].  
Other search methods Page 51 to 56  
How to use audio source Page 99 to 159  
You can operate the navigation system by  
touching keys displayed on the screen.  
The map of your surroundings is displayed.  
If the route is already set, the screen changes  
to route guidance mode.  
5 Turn off the vehicle engine to terminate  
the system.  
This navigation system is also turned off.  
Until your vehicle reach the vicinity of the  
destination, the set route will not be  
deleted even if the engine is turned off.  
When you use the navigation system for the first  
time, [Regional Settings] screen appears. On  
[Regional Settings] screen, you can change the  
language or time. (The settings can also be  
changed afterward.)  
How to read the current position screen ➞  
Page 37  
Setting the time Page 92  
To protect the LCD screen from damage,  
be sure to touch the touch keys with a fin-  
ger. (The stylus is supplied for special cali-  
brations. Do not use the stylus for normal  
operations.)  
3 Press the MENU button.  
Displays the navigation menu.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
[Information] menu  
How to Use Navigation Menu  
Screens  
The basic operation of the navigation is per-  
formed by using menus.  
The navigation menu is divided into four: [Desti-  
nation], [Information], [Map], and [Settings].  
Use this menu to check traffic information using  
the GEX-P10XMT*1  
Displaying Navigation menu  
.
If you are using the cellular phone featuring Blue-  
tooth technology by connecting the Bluetooth  
unit (ND-BT1)*2 to the navigation system, you can  
configure Bluetooth settings or check the outgo-  
ing/incoming call history. Also use to register  
information for emergencies.  
1 Press the MENU button.  
2 To change to the menu you want to use,  
touch the name of the menu displayed at  
the top of the screen.  
3 If you want to return to the map, press the  
MAP button.  
[Traffic On Route], [Traffic Events], [Traf-  
fic Flow], [Stock Info], [Browse], and [My  
Favorites] can be active only when the GEX-  
P10XMT*1 is connected to the navigation sys-  
tem.  
Navigation menu overview  
[Destination] menu  
[Phone Menu] can be active only when the  
Bluetooth unit (ND-BT1)*2 is connected to the  
navigation system.  
GEX-P10XMT*1:  
XM Digital Satellite Data & Audio Receiver (sold  
separately). Traffic information only available for  
cities where information is provided by XM  
NavTraffic service. Active subscription to XM  
NavTraffic required to receive traffic information  
on the navigation system.  
Also you can check your route, and the set route  
can be canceled from this menu.  
Specifying the address and searching for the  
destination Page 26  
Confirming traffic information Page 68  
Other search methods Page 51 to 56  
Registering information for emergencies ➞  
Page 78  
ND-BT1*2:  
Sold separately. Use for hands-free phoning and  
business card transfer via Bluetooth technology.  
And business card transfer via Bluetooth technol-  
ogy.  
[Map] menu  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
You can change the [View Mode], or set the  
items to be displayed during the navigation func-  
tion.  
Basic Navigation  
[View Mode] can be selected only when the  
vehicle position is at the current position. If  
you want to select [View Mode] while scroll-  
ing the map, press the MAP button to locate  
the vehicle position back to the current posi-  
tion.  
• For safety reasons, you cannot use some of  
these basic navigation functions while  
your vehicle is in motion. To enable these  
functions, you must stop in a safe place  
and apply the parking brake (see page 18  
Interlock for details).  
Settings menu  
Basic flow of operation  
1 Park your vehicle in a safe place, and  
apply the parking brake.  
2 Press the MENU button to display the  
navigation menu.  
Customize the navigation functions so they can  
be used easily.  
Settings menu Chapter 9  
3 Select the method of searching for your  
destination.  
Buttons you can use  
The availability of a specific button or function is  
indicated by its color. Depending on the status of  
your vehicle, some buttons will be available, while  
others will not be.  
4 Enter the information about your desti-  
nation to calculate route.  
5 Confirm the location at the map.  
Light gray touch key: The button is operable.  
6 Checking and fixing the route.  
7 Your navigation system sets the route to  
your destination, and the map of your  
surroundings appears.  
Dark gray touch key: The function is not available  
(e.g., operation is prohibited while driving).  
8 After releasing the parking brake, drive  
in accordance with the navigation infor-  
mation, subject to the important safety  
instructions noted on page 18 to 19.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Input the house number and touch [OK].  
Touch the characters you want to input.  
Also input a prefix to the house number.  
Touching [OK] with no input allows you to  
specify and search for a street name or the  
name of the city or area first.  
How to calculate your destina-  
tion by using Address Search  
The most frequently used function is [Address  
Search], in which the address is specified and  
the destination is searched. This section  
describes how to use [Address Search] and the  
basics of using the navigation system.  
6 Input the street name.  
When the options are narrowed down to six or  
less, a list of the matched streets automati-  
cally appears.  
1 Press the MENU button to display the  
navigation menu.  
When you enter the same characters as those  
entered previously, the system automatically  
displays the character that follows the entered  
characters. (Auto fill-in function.)  
2 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu.  
3 Touch [Address Search].  
Select the method for searching the destina-  
tion.  
For example, You can just enter part of the  
name, such as [California] for [Early Cali-  
fornia ct].  
When entering the characters, the unit will  
automatically search the database of all  
possible options. If there is only one letter  
that could possibly follow your entry, that  
letter will automatically be entered.  
A list appears if multiple options exist.  
Select the desired one from the list, and  
proceed to the next step. In rare cases, you  
need to input the city name to determine  
the city.  
4
Touch [State code key] to select the state,  
province, or territory.  
If the destination is in another state, this  
changes the state setting.  
Once the state has been selected, you only  
have to change states when your destina-  
tion is outside of the state you selected.  
State code key  
Selected state  
:
The input text is deleted one letter at a time  
from the end of the text. Continuing to touch  
deletes all of the text.  
[Back]:  
Returns you to the previous screen.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operation of state selection screen  
(6) [Back]:  
Returns previous screen.  
(1)  
(7)  
:
The input text is deleted one letter at a time  
from the end of the text. Continuing to touch  
deletes all of the text.  
(8) [City]:  
Touch if you want to specify the destination  
city or area first. (This is available only when  
(4) is blank.)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(1) [A-C] to [U-Z] :  
(9) [Sym.]:  
Use to jump to the first state, province, or ter-  
ritory which state with that alphabet.  
You can input text with marks such as [&] or  
[+].  
(2)  
:
(10) [0-9]:  
Use to see the next page or previous page of  
the list.  
You can input text with numbers.  
[Center]:  
(3) State list:  
This can be selected when you enter a city or  
area name first. Touch this button to display  
the central point of the entered city or area.  
Touching [OK] searches the route to the cen-  
tral point. Proceed to Step 9.  
Pressing one of these items, set that as  
search area.  
(4) [Back]:  
Returns previous screen.  
You can customize the keyboard type to be  
Operation of street name or city name  
input screen (e.g. QWERTY keyboard)  
displayed on the screen.  
(8)  
(4)  
(7)  
Page 92  
(11) Street:  
Touch if you want to return the street input  
mode. (This is available only when (8) is  
blank.)  
(5)  
(2)  
(10) (9)  
(1) (3) (6)  
Auto fill-in function  
(1) State code key :  
Jump to the state selection screen. (Selected  
state code is displayed.)  
(2) [OK] :  
Confirms the characters displayed in (4), and  
proceeds to the next step.  
(3) [List] :  
The previously entered characters are stored for  
each state. The next time a character is entered,  
suggested character will be shown. For example, if  
Lists candidates based on yellow characters  
in (4). Touch the desired item in the list to pro-  
ceed to the next step.  
[
E 220TH ST  
]
has been entered in the past, when  
E 220TH ST will be fill-in  
Auto fill-in function Page 27  
you input a letter just  
[
E
]
,
[
]
(4) Text box:  
automatically. The manually input characters are  
displayed in yellow, and the suggested characters  
are displayed in white, so you can distinguish them.  
To determine the filled-in character, touch [OK].  
Displays the characters that are entered.  
(5) Keyboard:  
Use to enter the text.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
7 Touch the street from the list.  
9 Touch [OK] after checking the location.  
“Location confirmation screen”  
If the selected street has only one matching  
location, the destination display screen  
appears. Proceed to Step 9.  
Route calculation starts.  
8 Touch the city or area where your destina-  
tion is located.  
When the route calculation is completed,  
“Route Confirmation screen” appears.  
“Location confirmation screen” appears.  
If there is no matching location, the navi-  
gation system displays [The address  
does not exit. Do you want to continue  
?]. When you touch [Yes], a place near the  
specified location appears. In this case,  
pay attention to the displayed location may  
not be suitable for your intention. If you  
want to try again, touch [No] to return to  
the previous screen.  
If you did not input the house number in  
Step 5, the house number input screen  
appear after this step. You should input the  
house number now (perform Step 5).  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To check the location at the map  
Operation of street list screen  
“Location confirmation screen”  
(4)  
(1)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(1) Calculating the route to the destination  
Route calculation starts. When the route cal-  
culation is completed, “Route Confirmation  
screen” appears.  
(2)  
(5)  
(1) Number of possible choices  
(2)  
:
Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls you  
through the list and allows you to view the  
remaining items.  
If you press the MAP button or MENU  
button during route calculation, the calcu-  
lation is canceled and the map screen  
appears.  
(3)  
:
If the character that cannot be displayed  
within the displayed area, touching  
right of the item allows you to see remained  
characters.  
to the  
(2) Scrolling the map  
The map display changes to the scroll mode.  
The scroll mode can fine-adjust the location,  
and then you can set the location as your des-  
tination or do various operation by using the  
shortcut menu.  
(4)  
:
Touching  
displays a map of the place you  
have selected. (Possibilities for place names  
may appear with the list screen.) You can also  
Shortcut menu Page 43  
set a destination by touching  
to the right  
of the list. Touching [OK] set the location  
pointed by the scroll cursor as your destina-  
tion.  
(3) Setting the location as waypoint  
The location indicated by the scroll cursor will  
be set as a waypoint.  
(5) [Back] :  
Adding a waypoint Page 34  
Returns previous screen.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10Touch [OK] to decide your route.  
may be displayed with the calculated  
route even if [Avoid Freeway] is [On]. That  
means the reference route if you use the free-  
way.  
(2) Distance to the destination  
(3) Travel time to destination  
(4) Fixes the displayed route  
Fixes the displayed route, and starts the route  
guidance.  
Checking and fixing the route  
When the route guidance starts Page 31  
You can check the route details. You can also  
recalculate the route in different conditions.  
Route Confirmation screen  
(5) Displaying multiple routes  
You can select a desired route from multiple  
route options. Calculated routes are shown in dif-  
ferent colors.  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
There can be cases that the same route is dis-  
played even when multiple routes are searched.  
(3)  
(2)  
(1)  
(1) Route calculation condition  
Shows the route has been calculated under those  
conditions.  
Touching  
to  
switch to another  
shows that fast route is prioritized.  
shows that short route is prioritized.  
route. Touching [OK] returns to the previous dis-  
play.  
If you set waypoints, you cannot use multiple  
route option.  
shows that using the highway and main  
road are is prioritized.  
(6) Changing the route calculation condition  
Modify each calculation condition, and recalcu-  
late the route.  
shows that use or disuse of freeway.  
shows that use or disuse of toll road.  
shows that use or disuse of ferry.  
Refer to after Step 3 of “Modifying the route  
calculation conditions” Page 32  
(7) View the route  
shows that use or disuse of learning  
route.  
In addition, if the calculated route have uni-  
You can check the streets which you will go  
through the destination.  
Refer to “Checking the route by text” ➞  
tended results, the following icons will be shown.  
Page 33  
shows that the route use freeway against  
the setting [Avoid Freeway] is [On].  
shows that the route use toll road against  
the setting [Avoid Toll Road] is [On].  
shows that the route use ferry against the  
setting [Avoid Ferry] is [On].  
(8) Checking the shape of route  
You can check overall shape of your route and the  
location of destination on the map.  
Refer to after the Step 2 of “Checking the  
entire route overview at the map” Page 34  
(9) Adding and editing the waypoint  
You can add/remove or sort waypoints.  
“Editing Waypoints” Page 34  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When the route guidance starts  
Canceling the Route Guidance  
Touching [OK] in “Route Confirmation screen”  
starts the route guidance on the displayed route.  
Your navigation system gives you the following  
information with the timing adjusted to the speed  
of your vehicle:  
If you no longer need to travel to your destination  
or if you want to change your destination, follow  
the steps below to cancel the route guidance.  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, then touch [Cancel Route].  
The message confirming whether to cancel  
the current route appears.  
• Distance to the next turning point  
• Direction of travel  
• Road number of the freeway  
• Arrival of waypoint (If waypoints are set)  
• Arrival of your destination  
2 Touch [Yes].  
Touching  
or  
allows you to turn the  
voice guidance on or off.  
Touching allows you to hear the  
information again.  
If you stop at a gas station or a restaurant dur-  
ing the route guidance, your navigation sys-  
tem remembers your destination and route  
Information. When you start the engine and  
get back on the road, the route guidance  
resumes.  
The current route is deleted, and a map of  
your surroundings reappears.  
On this screen, you can also select the follow-  
ing items:  
Skip :  
If you deviate from the route with guidance set  
to [Route View] or [Guide Mode] and enter  
a street not recorded on the hard disk drive,  
the screen changes to [Map Mode]. When  
you return to the route, returns to the original  
view and resumes route guidance.  
Skip the route to the selected waypoint, and  
the route is recalculated. (The skipped way-  
point will not be deleted.)  
No :  
Returns to the previous display without delet-  
ing the route.  
Basic items on the guidance  
This section describes only the basic items that  
are displayed on the Map Mode screen.  
Details of the map screen Page 37  
(2) (3)  
(1)  
(4)  
(1) Current location  
(2) Distance to the destination  
(3) Estimated time of arrival (default)  
(4) ON/OFF key of voice guidance  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Determine which condition takes priority for  
route calculation.  
Modifying the Route Calculation  
Conditions  
You can modify the conditions for route calcula-  
tion and recalculate the current route.  
[Fast]*:  
Calculate a route with the shortest travel time to  
your destination as a priority.  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].  
[Route Overview] is displayed only when  
the route is set.  
[Short]:  
Calculate a route with the shortest distance to  
your destination as a priority.  
2 Touch [Options].  
[Main Road]:  
Calculate a route that passes major arterial road  
as a priority.  
Avoid Toll Road  
This setting controls whether toll roads (including  
toll areas) should be taken into account.  
[On]:  
Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (including  
toll areas).  
3 Touch the desired items to change the  
route calculation conditions and then  
touch [OK].  
[Off]*:  
Calculate a route that may include toll roads  
(including toll areas).  
The system may calculate a route that  
includes toll road even if [On] is selected.  
Avoid Ferry  
This setting controls whether ferry crossings  
The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-  
mation screen” appears.  
should be taken into account.  
When a single route is calculated, the system  
searches the route that meets these condi-  
tions as much as possible.  
[On]:  
Calculate a route that avoids ferries.  
A single route is calculated in the following  
cases:  
[Off]*:  
Calculate a route that may include ferries.  
— When a waypoint is set  
— When a route is set through voice recogni-  
tion  
The system may calculate a route that  
— When auto reroute is carried out  
includes freeway even if [On] is selected.  
Avoid Freeway  
This setting controls whether freeways may be  
Items that users can operate  
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that  
they are default or factory settings.  
included in the route calculation.  
[On]:  
Calculate a route that avoids freeways.  
Route Condition  
This setting controls which the route should be  
calculated by taking into account the time or the  
distance or the main road.  
[Off]*:  
Calculate a route that may include freeways.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
The system may calculate a route that  
3 Touch or to scroll the list.  
Scroll the list as necessary.  
includes freeway even if [On] is selected.  
Names of the streets you are driving through  
Learning Route  
The system learns the travel history of each road  
and directional tendency.  
This setting controls whether or not the travel his-  
tory should be taken into account.  
[On]*:  
Calculate the route with the travel history taken  
into account.  
Turning direction  
Driving distance  
[Off]*:  
Calculate the route without the travel history  
taken into account.  
4 Touch [Back].  
You can return to the previous display.  
When a long distance route is calculated,  
your navigation system may not be able to  
list all roads. (In this case, the remaining  
roads will be shown in the list as you drive  
on.)  
[Clear]:  
Clear the current travel history.  
Checking the Current Route  
Checking the entire route over-  
view at the map  
You can check information about the route  
between your current location and your destina-  
tion.  
You can check the entire shape of the current route.  
You can select two methods:  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].  
Route confirmation screen appears.  
[Route Overview] is displayed only when  
the route is set.  
• Checking the passing streets with a list.  
• Checking the route by scrolling the map along  
the route.  
Checking the route by text  
You can check the route details.  
2 Touch [Detail].  
This function is not available if your vehicle  
has deviated from the route.  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].  
Route confirmation screen appears.  
[Route Overview] is displayed only when  
the route is set.  
2 Touch [Profile].  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 Touch the screen and place the scroll cur-  
sor on the point whose detail or entire pic-  
ture you want to view. Or zoom in or zoom  
out the map scale.  
Editing Waypoints  
You can select waypoints (locations you want to  
visit on the way to your destination) and you can  
recalculate the route to pass through these loca-  
tions.  
Adding a waypoint  
Up to 5 waypoints can be selected, and selected  
points can be sorted automatically or manually.  
The map around the scroll cursor is zoomed in  
or out so you can view the detail or the entire  
picture.  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].  
2 Touch [Waypoints].  
4 Touch [Back].  
The waypoint menu screen appears.  
You can return to the previous display.  
You can also check the overview by using  
the shortcut menu if [Whole Route Over-  
view] is selected on the [Short-Cut  
Selection].  
3 Touch [Add].  
Switch the display to search for points. After  
searching for a point, display it on a map, then  
touch [OK] to add to the waypoints. (You can  
add up to five waypoints in total.)  
4 Touch [OK].  
A route is recalculated, and “Route confirma-  
tion screen” appears.  
If you set a waypoint(s) in the route to your  
destination, the route up to the next way-  
point will appear light green. The rest of  
the route will be light in blue.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Manual:  
Deleting a waypoint  
You can manually sort destination and way-  
points. Touch the destination and waypoints  
on the left side of the screen in the order you  
want to visit. The touched destination and  
waypoints are displayed on the right side of  
the screen.  
You can delete waypoints from the route and then  
recalculate the route. (You can delete waypoints  
successively.)  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].  
2 Touch [Waypoints].  
The waypoint menu screen appears.  
3 Touch [Delete], then touch the waypoint  
you want to delete.  
The touched waypoint will be deleted from the  
list.  
4 Touch [OK].  
4 Touch [OK].  
The route is calculated again, and “Route con-  
firmation screen” appears.  
The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-  
mation screen” appears.  
“Checking and fixing the route” Page 30  
“Checking and fixing the route” Page 30  
Skipping a waypoint  
Sorting waypoints  
If the points are set, the next waypoint along the  
route can be skipped.  
You can sort waypoints, and recalculate the  
route.  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Cancel Route].  
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].  
2 Touch [Skip].  
2 Touch [Waypoints].  
A new route to your destination through all  
remaining waypoints, except for the skipped  
waypoint, is calculated.  
The waypoint menu screen appears.  
3 Touch [Sort], then touch [Automatic] or  
[Manual].  
The “Route confirmation screen” appears.  
“Checking and fixing the route” Page 30  
Automatic:  
You can sort the destination and waypoints  
automatically. The system will show the near-  
est waypoint (distance in a straight line) from  
the current location as waypoint 1, and sort  
the other points (including your destination)  
in order of distance from your current loca-  
tion.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
How to Read Map Display  
How to Use the Map  
How to view the map of the cur-  
rent location  
Most of the information provided by your naviga-  
tion system can be seen on the map. You need to  
get to know how the information appears on the  
map.  
This example shows the case where [Second  
Maneuver Arrow] is set to [View].  
Map View  
Displays standard map.  
Switching the view mode  
(1)  
(10)  
(20)  
There are five types of map display and two addi-  
tional view modes.  
(9)  
(16)  
(2)  
Map Mode  
Driver’s View  
Twin Map View  
(5)  
(3)  
(6)  
(11)  
Guide Mode (during route guidance only)  
Route View (during route guidance only)  
Vehicle Dynamics  
(8)  
(4)  
(12) (21)  
(7)  
Rear View (Only possible when the [Camera  
Input] is set to [On].)  
Guide View  
1 Press the MAP button to display a map of  
The standard map of your surroundings is over-  
laid with the name of the street you will turn onto  
next, and 2 arrows: the larger one on the left indi-  
cating the direction of your next maneuver and  
how far you are from approaching it, and the  
smaller one on the right indicating the direction  
of your second to next maneuver and how far you  
are from approaching it.  
the area around your current position.  
2 Press the MAP button again.  
3 Touch the mode name or press the MAP  
button to select the mode you want to dis-  
play.  
(1)  
(10)  
(20)  
(2)  
(9)  
(16)  
(5)  
(15)  
(22)  
(3)  
(6)  
(11)  
You can display the view mode screen by  
touching [Map] in the navigation menu,  
and touching [View Mode].  
(8)  
(4)  
(12)(21)  
(7)  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Route View  
Vehicle Dynamics Display  
Indicates the status of your vehicle.  
Displays the name of the street you will next  
travel along and an arrow indicating the direction  
of travel.  
(1)  
(10)  
(20)  
• In the Vehicle Dynamics Display mode,  
the speedometer display may show a dif-  
ferent speed than your vehicle’s actual  
speedometer, because your unit measures  
speed in a different way.  
(2)  
(9)  
(13)  
(5)  
(15)  
(3)  
(6)  
(11)  
(7)  
(8)  
(4)  
(21)  
Driver’s View  
The map from the driver’s viewpoint is shown.  
(1)  
(10)  
(20)  
You can change the items indicated on the left  
and right meters.  
(2)  
(9)  
(13)  
Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display ➞  
(15)  
(22)  
(3)  
Page 78  
(5)  
(6)  
(11)  
Rear View  
(7)  
Rear view image is displayed on the left-hand  
side of the screen, while the map of your sur-  
roundings is indicated on the right.  
(8)  
(4)  
(21)  
(2)  
(10)  
(20)  
About the 3D POI  
The specified POI appears in 3D. (Only the POI  
(9)  
sign may appear if there is not a 3D data.)  
(15)  
(22)  
(13)  
(5)  
The displayed 3D POI or POI sign in the left  
screen is not related [Overlay POI].  
(6)  
Twin Map View  
(8)  
(21)  
(7)  
You can split the screen vertically in half. The  
right screen and the left screen can display a  
map in different scales. If you set [Twin View  
2D/3D] to [3D], a 3D map appears on the left  
screen.  
If the [Camera Input] is set to [Off], the rear  
view image is not displayed. Please set it to  
[On].  
(1)  
(10)  
(20)  
Camera setting Page 154  
When using a camera set to turn On/Off in  
conjunction with the reverse signal, no cam-  
era images will be displayed in rear view mode  
while you are moving forward.  
(2)  
(9)  
(13)  
(15)  
(22)  
(6)  
(5)  
(6)  
(3)  
(11)  
If the camera is set always On, it can display  
images in rear view mode when the vehicle is  
moving forward. In that case, you should ask  
the camera maker or dealer whether the cam-  
era’s functions or lifetime would be affected.  
(7)  
(4)  
(7) (21)  
(8)  
Twin View 2D/3D Page 45  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Rear View can be displayed at all times (e.g.  
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a  
split screen where map information is partially  
displayed. Please beware that in this setting,  
camera image is not resized to fit to screen,  
and that a portion of camera image may not  
be viewable.  
(18)  
(19)  
Enlarged map of the intersection  
This screen is displayed only when [Close Up  
View] in the [Map] menu is [2D] or [3D].  
If the data for these items are not contained in  
the hard disk drive, the information is not  
available even if there are the signboards on  
the actual road.  
Enlarged map of the intersection (2D)  
City Map  
(13)  
When [City Map] in the [Map] menu is [On], in  
certain metropolitan city areas, a more detailed  
[City Map] is available at the 0.05 mi (50m) map  
scale or lower. (The screen changes automati-  
cally when you enter certain metropolitan city  
area.)  
(14)  
(23)  
(1)  
(10)  
(20)  
Enlarged map of the intersection (3D)  
(2)  
(5)  
(6)  
(3)  
(11)  
(8)  
(4)  
(21)  
(7)  
Display during freeway driving  
In certain locations of the freeway, lane informa-  
tion is available, indicating the recommended  
lane to be in to easily maneuver the next guid-  
ance.  
The detailed city map may not appear for the  
following reasons:  
• The data for that city area is not contained  
in the hard disk drive.  
• When you are driving on a freeway.  
(17)  
While driving on the freeway, freeway exit num-  
bers and freeway signs may be displayed when in  
the vicinity of interchanges and exits.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
greater than 25 mi (50 km), it is fixed to [north  
up].  
Display items  
Information with the mark (*) appears only  
Heading up:  
when the route is set.  
The map display always shows the vehicle’s  
direction as proceeding toward the top of the  
screen.  
Depending on the conditions and settings,  
some items may not be displayed.  
North up:  
Current location  
The map display always has north at the top of  
the screen.  
The current location of your vehicle. The tip of the  
triangular mark indicates your heading and the  
display moves automatically as you drive.  
(6) Zoom in/Zoom out  
Touch to change the map’s scale.  
The center of the triangular mark is the cur-  
Changing the map’s scale Page 41  
rent vehicle position.  
(7) Map scale  
The scale of the map is indicated by distance.  
Destination*  
The checker-flag indicates your destination.  
Changing the map’s scale Page 41  
(8) VOICE icon  
Touch to change to the voice recognition mode.  
Guidance point*  
The next guidance point (next turning point, etc.)  
is shown by a yellow flag.  
This is displayed only when the microphone  
for voice recognition is connected.  
The guidance points of up to three point ahead  
including the waypoint are displayed.  
The voice operation of the navigation system  
(9) Traffic status  
This appears when an XM satellite radio tuner  
waypoint  
The checker-flag and number (1 to 5) indicates  
your waypoint.  
(GEX-P10XMT, sold separately) is connected, and  
traffic information is received.  
(1) Name of the next street to be used*  
(2) Distance to the guidance point*  
TRFC — No problem.  
ANTENNA — Improper antenna connection.  
UPDATING — Updating encryption code.  
Touching  
allows you to hear the infor-  
mation again.  
Tuner” Page 75  
(3) Distance to the destination (or distance to  
waypoint)*  
The distance on this button shows the distance to  
(10) Current time  
(11) Estimated time of arrival (or travel time  
to your destination)*  
The display alternates by pressing it.  
the destination or to each waypoint. If waypoints  
are set, the distance to the destination and the  
next waypoint chage with each touch.  
The estimated time of arrival is automatically cal-  
culated from the Average Speed set and the  
actual average speed.  
When the vehicle position is on the route, the  
distance to the destination (or waypoint)  
appears. When the vehicle position is not on  
the route, the linear distance to the destina-  
tion (or waypoint) appears.  
The estimated time of arrival is a guideline  
and may not correspond to the actual time of  
arrival.  
(4) Name of the street your vehicle is travel-  
ing along (or City Name, etc.)  
How to set average speed Page 93  
(12) Tracking dot  
The tracking dot shows the route your vehicle has  
(5) Compass  
The red arrow indicates north. If the scale is less  
traveled by white dots.  
than 25 mi (50 km), touching the map changes  
the direction that it is displayed in (north up/  
heading up). When the scale of the map is  
Select the tracking setting Page 45  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(13) Map of your surroundings (Side map)  
Touching on the map briefly shows the shortcut  
(21) Mute Voice Guidance icon  
Touch to turn on or off the mute setting of Voice  
menu, while touching longer changes the map to  
the Scroll mode.  
Guidance. You can select between display and  
non-display.  
Moving the map to the location you want to  
Selecting display or non-display for the Mute  
Voice Guidance icon Page 46  
(14) Distance to an intersection*  
Displayed on the enlarged intersection map. The  
(22) Second Maneuver Arrow  
The turing direction two corners ahead appears.  
green bar gets shorter as your vehicle  
approaches an intersection.  
You can select between display and non-display.  
Selecting display or non-display for the Sec-  
ond Maneuver Arrow Page 46  
(15) Next direction of travel*  
When you approach an intersection, it appears  
(23) POI icon  
The POI icon may appear on the enlarged map of  
green. The screen displays the distance to the  
next guidance point, and the next guidance point  
after that.  
the intersection (when available data exists.).  
(16) Direction line*  
The direction towards the location set in (4) is  
Changing the scale of the map  
Touching the [Zoom in/Zoom out] key displayed  
on the upper right of the screen displays the  
scale gauge. (When the view mode is set to Map  
Mode or Guide Mode, the [Direct scale] key is  
displayed.) Directly touching the [Direct scale]  
key changes the map to the selected scale.)  
indicated with a straight line.  
(17) Lane information*  
Lane information is displayed the first time there  
is a voice guidance on your route. The indications  
with white arrow on the green plate is the most  
reccomended lane. If the next traveling direction  
screen is displayed when you approach a inter-  
change, junction or exit, the lane information dis-  
appears.  
Touching  
or  
above the scale gauge allows  
you to specify the scale in greater detail within a  
range of 25 yards to 1 000 miles (25 meters to  
2 000 kilometers).  
(18) Freeway signs*  
These show the road number and give directional  
information.  
(19) Freeway exit information*  
Displays the freeway exit.  
(20) Bluetooth Connected icon  
This icon is displayed when the cellular phone  
Direct scale key  
featuring Bluetooth technology is connected cor-  
rectly. You can select between display and non-  
display.  
The icon of a registered location and the traf-  
fic information icons are displayed when the  
map scale is 10 miles (20 km) or lower.  
: Connected  
Traffic line is displayed when the map scal is 1  
mile (2 km) or lower.  
: Disconnected  
POI icons are displayed when the map scale is  
This is available only when the Bluetooth unit  
0.75 mile (1 km) or lower.  
(sold separately) is connected.  
Selecting display or non-display for the Blue-  
Scroll the map to the location  
you want to see  
tooth icon Page 46  
Touching anywhere on the map changes the map  
to “Scroll mode” and the map begins scrolling in  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
the direction you touched. The scrolling stops  
when you release your finger from the screen.  
Pressing the MAP button returns you to the map  
of your surroundings.  
Viewing the information of a specified  
location  
An icon appears at registered places (home loca-  
tion, specific places, address book entries) and  
places where there is a POI icon or traffic infor-  
mation icon. Place the scroll cursor over the icon  
to view the detailed information.  
This is the line connecting between the current  
location and scroll cursor.  
Touch the area close to the center of the  
screen to scroll slowly; touch near the sides of  
the screen to scroll through quickly.  
1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor  
to the icon you want to view.  
During [Twin Map View], the map on the left  
hand side cannot be scrolled. Touch the map  
on the right hand side to scroll the maps.  
2 Touch  
.
(1)  
(3)  
(2)  
(5)  
Information for a specified location appears.  
(4)  
(1) Scroll cursor  
The position of scroll cursor shows the location  
selected on the current map.  
The information shown varies according to  
the location. (There may be no information for  
that location.)  
When the scale is 0.25 mi (200 m) or lower,  
the road appears light blue in the vicinity of  
the scroll cursor.  
Registering places Page 59  
Displaying facilities (POI) icon on the map  
(2) Direction line  
This is the line connecting between the current  
location and scroll cursor.  
Icons for traffic information Page 68  
[Dial] becomes active when the Bluetooth  
unit (sold separately) is connected to the  
navigation system together with the cellu-  
lar phone. By touching [Dial], you can  
make a phone call to the displayed phone  
number.  
The direction towards the scroll cursor is indi-  
cated with a straight line.  
(3) Distance from the current location  
This shows the distance in a straight line  
between the location indicated by the scroll cur-  
sor and your current location.  
(4) The street name, city name, area name  
and other information for this location.  
(The information displayed varies according to  
3 Touch [Back].  
the scale.)  
You can return to the previous display.  
Touching  
on the right displays hidden text.  
4 Touch  
.
Displaying information on the specified loca-  
You can return to the map of your surround-  
ings.  
(5) Current location key  
You can also return to the map of your sur-  
roundings by pressing the MAP button.  
Touching  
returns you to the map of your cur-  
rent location.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Touching [Registration] and selecting  
[OK] allow you to register the location to  
Address Book.  
Shortcut menu  
Shortcuts allow you to perform various tasks,  
such as route calculation for the location indi-  
cated by the scroll cursor, or registering a loca-  
tion in [Address Book], faster than using the  
navigation menu.  
How to edit a registered location ➞  
Page 61  
: Vicinity Search  
You can customize the shortcuts displayed  
onscreen. The shortcuts described here are pre-  
pared as default setting.  
You select a location with the scroll cursor.  
Nearby POIs (Points Of Interest) will also be  
found.  
Changing a shortcut Page 47  
Searching for the facilities surrounding a  
certain place Page 53  
When the Bluetooth unit (Sold separately) is  
connected to the navigation system, you can  
display shortcuts related to phone functions.  
: Overlay POI  
You can select the icon of the facilities to be  
displayed on the map.  
Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be  
removed from the shortcut menu.  
Displaying Certain Facilities on the Map ➞  
Page 47  
1 When the map is displayed, touch  
.
: Volume  
On the Volume Settings screen, you can  
adjust the guidance volume or the cellular  
phone volume.  
Volume Page 91  
Shortcut menu  
: BT telephone Book  
You can display the telephone book trans-  
ferred to the navigation system.  
Telephone Book Page 88  
: Route Options*  
Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This  
item can be selected only during route guid-  
ance.  
: Menu Close  
You can add changes to your route and check  
it.  
Hides the shortcut menu.  
Searching for another route Page 32  
Checking the route Page 33  
Canceling the route guidance Page 31  
Skipping a waypoint Page 35  
: Destination*  
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the  
route to the place specified with the scroll cur-  
sor.  
To check the location at the map ➞  
Page 29  
: Registration  
Registers the location indicated by the scroll  
cursor to Address Book.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Modifying Map Configurations  
Close Up View  
You can select the method to display the close  
• For safety reasons, these functions are not  
available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop  
in a safe place and put on the parking  
brake before setting your route (see page  
18 Interlock for details).  
up view of the intersection.  
2D*:  
Displays the close up view with the 2D map.  
3D:  
Displays the close up view with [Driver’s  
View].  
Off:  
Do not display the close up view.  
Entering the Map Menu  
City Map  
You can select whether to display or not the  
city map when in certain metropolitan city  
areas.  
1 Press the MENU button to display the  
navigation menu.  
2 Touch [Map] to display the Map menu.  
On*:  
Automatically switches to the city map when  
in a city map area.  
3 Change the setting.  
Adjusting each item Page 45 to 46  
This section describes the details of the  
setting for each item. Settings marked with  
an asterisk (*) show that they are default or  
factory settings.  
Off:  
Do not show the city map.  
Even if you switch [City Map] to [On], city  
map cannot display in the area where  
there is no city map data.  
Tracking Display  
Setting the Item on the Map  
Screen  
You can display the trace of your passing with  
white dots on the route.  
You can select whether to display or hide the icon  
on the map or how to display the map.  
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then  
touch [Displayed Info].  
The Displayed Info screen appears.  
On (Always):  
Display tracking for all journeys.  
On (This journey):  
Display tracking dots but erase them when  
the navigation system is turned off (when  
turning off the engine of your vehicle).  
Off*:  
On this screen, you can operate the following  
items.  
Do not display tracking dots.  
Twin View 2D/3D  
You can select whether to display the left map  
2 To finish the setting, touch [OK].  
screen of the Twin Map View in 2D or in 3D.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
2D*:  
View*:  
Displays the 2D map.  
Displays the second corner ahead of the vehi-  
cle on the map.  
Hide:  
Hides the second corner ahead of the vehicle  
on the map.  
Bluetooth Connected  
Selects whether to display or hide the icon for  
current status of the phone connection via  
Bluetooth wireless technorogy.  
View*:  
3D:  
Displays the 3D map.  
Displays the icon on the map.  
Hide:  
Hides the icon on the map.  
Show Mute Button  
Selects whether to display or hide the voice  
guidance mute key on the map.  
View*:  
Displays the voice guidance mute on the map.  
Hide:  
Hides the voice guidance mute key from the  
map.  
Show Traffic Incident  
Selects whether to display or hide the traffic  
notification icon on the map when incidents  
are on your route.  
Page 70  
View*:  
Displays the icon on the map.  
Hide:  
Hides the icon on the map.  
Second Maneuver Arrow  
Selects whether to display or hide the second  
corner ahead of the vehicle on the map  
(except for [Route View]).  
About Second Maneuver Arrow Page 41  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Selecting the Shortcut  
: Dial Favorite 1 to 5  
You can make a call to the phone number reg-  
istered in [Dial Favorite].  
Select shortcuts to display on the map screen. In  
the list displayed onscreen, the items with red  
checks are displayed on the map screen. Touch  
the shortcut you want to display and then touch  
[OK] when a red check appears. You can select  
up to five shortcuts.  
“Registering a phone number in Dial  
Favorite” Page 87  
: Whole Route Overview  
Displays the entire route (currently set).  
Checking the whole route overview Page  
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then  
touch [Short-Cut Selection].  
: Stock Info  
The Short-Cut Selection screen appears.  
Displays stock prices.  
Displaying share prices Page 73  
: Browse  
Displays XM tuner browsable information.  
Displaying browsable information ➞  
Page 74  
: My Favorites  
On this screen, you can operate the following  
items.  
Displays information on your favorite brows-  
able item for XM tuner.  
2 Touch the item which you want to set in  
the shortcut menu.  
Displaying favorite browsable information  
The item with a red check mark is displayed in  
the shortcut menu.  
: Traffic On Route  
Displaying a list of traffic information on the route.  
Displaying traffic information on the route  
: Registration*  
Register to the Address Book information on  
the location indicated by the scroll cursor.  
Register to Address Book Page 60  
: Traffic Events  
Displaying a list of traffic events information.  
: Vicinity Search*  
: Day/Night Display  
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of  
the scroll cursor.  
Switches Day/Night Display setting.  
Searching the facilities surrounding a cer-  
tain place Page 51  
3 To finish the setting, touch [OK].  
: Overlay POI*  
Displaying POI on the Map  
Displays icon for surrounding facilities (POI)  
on the map.  
Displays on the map the icon for surrounding  
facilities (POI).  
Viewing POI information Page 42  
: Volume*  
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then  
touch [Overlay POI].  
Display [Volume Setting].  
Volume Page 91  
2 Touch [Display] to turn it [On].  
If you do not want to display the POI icon  
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it  
[Off]. (Even if [Display] is turned [Off],  
the POI selection setting is retained.)  
: Phone Book*  
Displays [Phone Book].  
“Editing the Phone Book data” Page 88  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 Touch the category you want to display.  
3 Touch or to switch to the next page or  
previous page.  
4 Touch [Select Detail].  
On this screen, you can operate the following  
[Select All]:  
items.  
Selects all detailed categories that are  
included in that category. (E.g. all categories  
of restaurants including Japanese and fast  
food.)  
Day:  
You can check the color of the Day screen.  
Night:  
You can check the color of the Night screen.  
To return the previous screen, touch  
[Back].  
[Deselect All]:  
Deselects the selected category.  
5 Touch the desired detailed category.  
You can select up to 100 items from the  
detailed category.  
About “Roads without turn by-  
turn instructions”  
Routable roads (The route displayed and high-  
lighted in purple color) have only basic data and  
can only be used to plot a navigable route. Pio-  
neer Navigation will only display a navigable  
route on the map (only the arrival guidance for  
the destination or a waypoint is available). Please  
review and obey all local traffic rules along the  
highlighted route. (For your safety.)  
The category already set will have a red check  
mark.  
No turn-by-turn directions or arrow icons will be  
displayed on these roads.  
6 To finish the selection, touch [OK].  
Viewing POI information Page 42  
When your vehicle reaches to the entrance of this  
road, the icon  
that the guidance is not available with this type of  
road. The icon will be indicated for the road  
will be displayed, indicating  
Browsing the Map Color Expla-  
nation  
with which the guidance is available.  
You can browse the type of the roads and areas  
displayed on the map.  
The Close-up of intersection function, Auto  
Reroute function, Changing the view to Guide  
View, or Route View are not available.  
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then  
touch [Map Legend].  
2 Touch the type which you want to see.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Changing the View Mode for the  
Navigation Map  
Changing the Setting of Naviga-  
tion Interrupting Screen  
You can change the map display mode.  
Setting whether or not to switch to the navigation  
screen automatically when your vehicle  
approaches a guidance point such as an inter-  
section while displaying a screen other than navi-  
gation.  
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then  
touch [View Mode].  
2 Touch the type which you want to set.  
How to Use the Map Page 37  
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.  
2 Touch [AV Guide Mode] to change the  
setting.  
Setting the Map Color Change  
between Day and Night  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
To improve the visibility of the map during the  
evening, you can set the timing to change the  
combination of the map color.  
On*:  
Switching from audio operation screen to nav-  
igation screen.  
Off:  
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.  
Screen is not switched.  
2 Touch [Day/Night Display] to change the  
setting.  
Changing the Map Color  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
You can set the map color to bluish or reddish.  
Automatic*:  
You can change the colors of a map between  
daytime and nighttime according to whether  
the vehicle lights are On or Off.  
Day:  
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.  
2 Touch [Road Color] to change the setting.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
The map is always displayed with daytime col-  
ors.  
Blue*:  
Changes the map color to bluish.  
Red:  
To use this function with [Automatic], the  
Orange/white lead of the navigation sys-  
tem must be connected correctly.  
Changes the map color to reddish.  
Check the color change with the [Map  
Legend].  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
• Searching for POIs by specifying a city name  
first  
• Searching a POI from a name of the facilities  
directly  
• For safety reasons, these route-setting  
functions are not available while your  
vehicle is in motion. To enable these func-  
tions, you must stop in a safe place and  
put on the parking brake before setting  
your route. (see page 18 Interlock for  
details).  
Searching for POIs by specifying a cat-  
egory first  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [POI Search].  
2 Touch the state code key of the destina-  
tion and select the state or province (or  
territory).  
Some information on traffic regulations  
depends on the time when the route calcula-  
tion is performed. Thus, the information may  
not correspond with a certain traffic regula-  
tion when your vehicle actually passes the  
location. Also, the information on the traffic  
regulations provided will be for a passenger  
vehicle, and not for a truck or other delivery  
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic regu-  
lations when driving.  
Selecting the state where you want to  
3 Touch [Category].  
Category  
Searching for Points of Interest  
(POI)  
Information about various facilities (Points Of  
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, amusement  
parks or restaurants, is available. By entering the  
POI Name, you can search for a POI.  
4 Touch the desired category.  
POI’s are divided into several categories.  
You can also narrow down the search range  
by initially specifying the name of the city  
where your destination is located and also by  
initially specifying the category.  
Use the functions [POI Search] and [Vicin-  
ity Search] in different situations. In [POI  
Search], the distance is not limited, but in  
[Vicinity Search], the distance for the search  
is limited to within a 16 km (10 mile) radius.  
If the category is not sub-divided into more  
detailed categories, the list will not be dis-  
played. Proceed to Step 6.  
[Name] :  
Touch if you want to first specify the POI  
name.  
Searching for Points of Interest  
(POI)  
[City] :  
The following three methods are available for  
searching facilities by POI:  
Touch if you want to first specify the destina-  
tion city or area.  
• Searching for POIs by specifying a category  
first  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
[Back]:  
You can use this sort function only when  
Return the Destination menu.  
the candidates are less than 2000.  
5 Touch the detailed category.  
8 Touch desired POI for your destination.  
6 Input the name of the facilities.  
The “Location confirmation screen” appears.  
Calculating the route to the destination ➞  
Page 29  
[City] :  
Touch to specify the destination city or area,  
and then input the city name. (This is available  
only when [Name] is blank.)  
Touching  
displays a map of the sur-  
roundings of the selected POI.  
If the selected POI is the name of a chain  
of outlets and consequently the same store  
name applies to different locations (the  
number of outlets appears next to the  
chain’s name), touch the name of the POI  
to display a list of those POIs with city  
name and street name, touch to set the  
POI as your destination.  
[List]:  
Lists candidate based on yellow characters in  
the text box (suggested character in white is  
invalid). Touch the desired facility in the list to  
proceed to the next step.  
When the options are narrowed down to  
six or less, a list of the matched facilities  
automatically appears.  
When you enter the same characters as  
those entered previously, the system auto-  
matically displays the character string that  
follows the entered characters. (Auto fill-in  
function.)  
Searching for POIs by specify-  
ing a city name  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [POI Search].  
Auto fill-in function Page 27  
If less than six POIs in a detailed category  
are registered, the screen for inputting the  
POI name is not displayed. Please proceed  
to Step 7.  
2 Touch the state code key of the destina-  
tion and touch [OK].  
Selecting the zone where you want to  
7 Touch  
Touching  
.
3 Touch [City].  
sorts the items in the list  
4 Input the name of the city that has the  
in the order of distance.  
facility you want to search.  
Searching range is approximately 10 miles (16  
km) square from the current location.  
Auto fill-in function is available.  
Auto fill-in function Page 27  
:
Sorts the items in the list in the alphabetical  
order.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A list of cities that include the entered charac-  
ter appears.  
4 Touch the facility from the list.  
[List]:  
Lists candidate based on yellow characters in  
the text box (suggested character in white is  
invalid). Touch the desired city in the list to  
proceed to the next step.  
5 Input the name of the facilities.  
You can also narrow down the candidates by  
specifying the category before the name  
input.  
Icons are helpful for quickly telling the cat-  
egory of facities with the same name.  
Subsequent Operations Page 52 (Step 7  
and 8)  
Subsequent Operations Page 52 (Step 6  
to 8)  
Finding a POI in your surround-  
ings  
Searching a POI from a name of  
the facilities directly  
You can search for Points Of Interest in your sur-  
roundings. Use it to find a POI to visit during a  
journey. Searching range is approximately 10  
miles (16 km) square from the current location.  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [POI Search].  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].  
The list of POI categories appears.  
2 Touch the state code key of the destina-  
tion and touch [OK].  
Selecting the zone where you want to  
2 Touch the desired category.  
Category  
3 Input the name of the facilities.  
The category already set will have a red check  
mark. When only a few types of the detailed  
categories are selected, blue check marks will  
appear.  
Auto fill-in function is available.  
Auto fill-in function Page 27  
A list of the facilities that include the entered  
character appears.  
[OK] :  
[List]:  
Start search with the selected category.  
[Back] :  
Lists candidate based on yellow characters in  
the text box (suggested character in white is  
invalid). Touch the desired facility in the list to  
proceed to the next step.  
Returns to the previous screen.  
[Set] :  
Display the screen for registering POI short-  
cuts.  
Register POI shortcut Page 56  
If you touch one of the POI shortcuts (e.g.  
) before selecting category on the list,  
you can start searching for facilities  
directly by the category registered on the  
POI shortcut.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
If you want to search for facilities by using  
both marked category and POI shortcut,  
select some categories in the list and then  
touch the POI shortcut to start searching.  
3 Touch [Select Detail].  
Distance to the facility  
8 Touch desired POI for your destination.  
The “Location confirmation screen” appears.  
Calculating the route to the destination ➞  
Page 29  
[Select All]:  
Selects all detailed categories that are  
included in that category. (E.g. all categories  
of restaurants including Japanese and fast  
food)  
When you touch  
, the POIs around the  
specified location are shown on a map.  
Searching the destination by map ➞  
Page 43  
[Deselect All]:  
Deselects the selected category.  
Searching for the facilities  
around the scroll cursor  
4 Touch the desired detailed category.  
Searching range is approximately 10 miles (16  
km) square from the scroll cursor.  
1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor  
to the place where you want to search for  
POI.  
2 Touch  
.
The category already set will have a red check  
mark.  
The shortcut menu appears.  
3 Touch  
.
5 Touch [Back].  
Returns previous screen.  
See Step 2 of [Finding a POI in your surround-  
ings] for the following operations.  
Finding a POI in your surroundings ➞  
Page 53  
6 Repeat Step 2 to 5 to select a category,  
and touch [OK].  
This can be used when Vicinity Search is  
selected in Short-Cut Selection.  
Changing Shortcut Page 47  
The distance indicated in the search result  
is the distance from the scroll cursor to the  
facility.  
The POI in the selected category or subcate-  
gory is searched.  
You can select from the detailed category  
up to 100 items.  
7 Touch [OK].  
Names of POIs and their distance from your  
current location appear. They are listed in  
order from nearest to farthest. To the left of  
each item is an icon indicating the category.  
The bottom icon is for shortcuts to your  
favorite categories. Touching the shortcuts  
icon displays a list of the facilities in a cate-  
gory.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[Vicinity Search] in the navigation menu  
Searching for Your Destination  
by Specifying the Telephone  
Number  
searches your surroundings. On the other  
hand, in the case of  
in the Shortcut  
scroll cursor after the map is scrolled will  
be searched.  
If you know the telephone number of your desti-  
nation, you can quickly search for your destina-  
tion by specifying the telephone number.  
You can also search for the phone number  
[Phone #] on [Address Book].  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Telephone  
Search].  
The telephone number entry screen appears.  
2 Input a telephone number.  
The “Location confirmation screen” appears.  
Calculating the route to the destination ➞  
Page 29  
If there is more than one place for the  
number input, a list of those places is dis-  
played. Touch the item you want in the list.  
Route Calculation to Your Home  
Location or to Your Favorite  
Location  
If your home location is registered, the route  
home can be calculated by a single touch of the  
touch key from the navigation menu. Also, you  
can register one location, such as your work-  
place, as your favorite location, and the route is  
calculated in a similar way.  
tion” Page 59  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Return Home] or  
[Go to].  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Selecting Destination from the  
Registering/deleting POI Short-  
Destination History and Address cuts  
Book  
You can register up to six shortcuts to your favor-  
ite POI. You can also change or delete the regis-  
tered shortcuts.  
Any place that has been searched before is  
stored in [Destination History]. Places that you  
have registered manually, such as your home,  
are stored in [Address Book]. Simply select the  
place you want to go to from the list and a route  
to that place will be calculated.  
Registering a POI shortcut  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].  
For information on Address Book Page 60  
For information on Destination History ➞  
2 Touch [Set].  
Page 65  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Address Book] or  
[Destination History].  
2 Touch your destination name.  
Displays a list of already registered POI short-  
cuts.  
3 Touch [Add].  
The “Location confirmation screen” appears.  
Calculating the route to the destination ➞  
Page 29  
You can also see the destination by touch-  
ing  
on the right of the list.  
Displays a POI category list.  
Searching the destination with map ➞  
4 Touch category.  
Page 43  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5 Touch the POI selection method.  
Subsequent operations Page 54  
Touching a category adds that category to the  
shortcuts.  
You can register a POI shortcut by touch-  
ing  
on the map. The registering steps  
are the same as described above.  
Deleting a POI shortcut  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].  
You can also touch  
in the shortcut  
menu.  
2 Touch [Set].  
3 Touch [Delete].  
Displays a list of already registered POI short-  
cuts.  
4 Touch the category to be deleted.  
A red check appears on the selected shortcut.  
All (None):  
A red check will appear or disappear on all  
registered categories.  
5 Touch [Delete].  
Deletes the selected shortcut from the list.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Registering and Editing Locations  
Registering your home and your  
favorite location  
• For safety reasons, these functions are not  
available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop  
in a safe place and put on the parking  
brake before setting your route (see page  
18 Interlock for details).  
You can register one home location and one  
favorite location. You can change the registered  
information later. You might find it useful to regis-  
ter your workplace or a relative’s home as your  
favorite location.  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Defined Locations].  
Registering Locations Overview  
2 Touch [Go to].  
Registering places you visit frequently saves time  
and effort. Also, routes to registered locations  
can be calculated easily by touching the corre-  
spond touch key. This registered location infor-  
mation can also be modified.  
When registering your home location, touch  
[Home].  
The registered locations are categorized into  
the following three types:  
: Home location:  
Register your home location here. Once your  
home location is registered, the route to your  
home can be set by simply touching [Return  
Home] in the Destination menu. Only one  
location can be registered.  
3 Search for a location to register.  
You can select a method of location search.  
: Favorite location:  
Register here the point that you frequently  
visit (for example, your office). Once your  
favorite location is registered, route to your  
favorite location can be set by simply touching  
[Go to] in the Destination menu. Only one  
location can be registered.  
Address Search Page 26  
Information on searching locations to reg-  
: (default): Address Book entry:  
Register here other points you often visit.  
Once locations are registered, you can set the  
route by selecting an item from Address  
Book.  
If you select [Map Search], move the  
scroll cursor to the place you want to set  
and touch [OK].  
The items in Address Book are automatically  
updated in alphabetic order. However, [Home  
location] and [Favorite location] always  
appear at the top (if you registered them).  
4 Point the scroll cursor to the location you  
want to register and touch [OK].  
The location is registered, and the Edit regis-  
tered information screen appears.  
“Editing a location’s information”  
Page 61  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5 Touch [OK].  
The location is registered, and the Edit regis-  
tered information screen appears.  
“Editing a location’s information” ➞  
Page 61  
Completes the registration.  
Registering location into  
Address Book  
4 Touch [OK].  
Completes the registration.  
The Address Book can store up to 400 regis-  
tered locations. These can include home loca-  
tion, favorite places, and destinations you have  
already registered.  
Registering location by Address  
Book  
1 Touch [Address Book] in the Destination  
menu.  
Registering location by scroll mode  
1 From Shortcut Selection, select Registra-  
tion.  
2 Touch [Add].  
Short-cut Selection Page 47  
2 Search for the location, and touch  
[Scroll].  
The scroll mode is established.  
3 Select the search method, search the loca-  
tion, and display the map.  
4 When the map of the location you want to  
register is displayed, touch [OK].  
When you want to register the location  
after you move to another location, touch  
the screen to scroll the map, and place the  
cursor on the point you want to register.  
3 Display the shortcut menu, and touch  
The location is registered, and the Edit regis-  
tered information screen appears.  
“Editing a location’s information” ➞  
Page 61  
.
5 Touch [OK].  
Completes the registration.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The viewpoint of the Address  
Book  
(6)  
:
Sorts the items in the list in order of the dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
Active if the list item number is not equal  
to 0 and current sort is not by distance  
form current position.  
menu, then touch [Address Book].  
(4) (5)  
(7)  
:
(7)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
It is the default sorting order.  
Active if the list item number is not equal  
to 0 and current sort is not by alphabeti-  
cally.  
(6)  
(8)  
(9)  
(10)  
(11)  
(8)  
:
(1) Home location:  
Sorts the items in the list in order of the  
recently used items.  
The item displayed with  
icon is the home  
Active if the List item number is not equal  
to 0 and current sort is not by last used.  
(9) [Add]:  
location. When you touch this, the route is cal-  
culated, and the route guidance screen  
appears.  
The screen for selecting the method for regis-  
tering the location in Address Book appears.  
“Registering location by Address Book”➞  
Page 60  
“Registering your home and your favorite  
location” Page 59  
(2) Favorite location:  
(10) [Delete]:  
The item displayed with  
icon is the favor-  
Deletes the registered locations.  
Page 64  
ite location. When you touch this, the route is  
calculated, and the route guidance screen  
appears.  
(11) [Back]:  
Returns previous screen.  
location” Page 59  
Editing a registered location’s  
information  
(3) Address Book entry:  
When you touch this, the route is calculated,  
and the route guidance screen appears.  
In the Address Book menu, touching  
on the  
right-hand side of the place displays the Edit reg-  
istered information screen.  
(4)  
:
The map of that location can be displayed.  
“Calculating the route to the destination”  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, then touch [Address Book].  
2 Touch  
on the right-hand side of the  
(5)  
:
location whose information you want to  
edit.  
The information related to that place can be  
edited.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(8)  
tion” Page 61  
(7)  
(6) (5)  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
(1) Name  
You can enter the desired name.  
(2) Pronunciation  
You can enter the desired pronunciation inde-  
pendently from the name. The registered pro-  
nunciation is used for voice recognition.  
Information on voice operation ➞  
Chapter 17  
If there are multiple locations with a regis-  
tered sound effect within approx. 0.19  
miles (300 m) radius, then only the closest  
one will play.  
When you switch the language of the navi-  
gation system, the registered pronuncia-  
tions cannot be used for voice recognition.  
(3) Phone #  
The phone number of the registered location.  
You can dial this number by using (8).  
You can search by registered telephone  
number.  
Changing a name  
1 Touch [Name], then touch [Yes].  
The message confirming whether or not to  
register the entered name as voice command  
is displayed.  
(4) Icon  
The symbol displayed on the map and  
Address Book.  
Alternative option:  
(5) Picture  
No:  
As you approach the location, the registered  
image appears.  
When not registering a name as a voice com-  
mand, select [No].  
You can register the picture stored in the navi-  
gation system. You can also import and regis-  
ter a picture shot from a digital camera etc.,  
by using a CD-ROM.  
2 Enter a new name, then touch [OK].  
The current name appears in the text box.  
Delete the current name, and enter a new  
name between 1 and 22 characters long.  
(6) Sound  
The selected operating sound is played.  
(7) Modify Location  
3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch  
[Yes].  
You can change the registered location by  
scrolling the map.  
The details you set are registered, and the  
Address Book menu appears.  
Alternative options:  
(8) Dial  
Only when the Bluetooth unit is connected to  
the navigation system and the cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth technology is also con-  
nected, you can make a phone call to the reg-  
istered phone number (3) by touching [Dial].  
“Dialing the entry in the Address Book” ➞  
Page 86  
No:  
Jump to the pronunciation input screen.  
Repeat:  
You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the  
name you entered.  
No sounds can be output during  
.
When you confirm the pronunciation,  
is shown on the left side of the location  
name displayed in “Address Book menu”.  
This icon indicates that this name can be  
used as a voice command during voice  
operation.  
When you approach the registered loca-  
tion while travelling  
When the location with a sound effect and an  
image are registered comes into approx. 0.19  
miles (300 m) radius from the vehicle position,  
the sound effect plays and the image appears.  
You cannot change the name of your  
home.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing a pronunciation  
Selecting an icon to appear on the map  
1 Touch [Pronunciation], then touch [Yes].  
1 Touch [Icon].  
2 Enter a new pronunciation, then touch  
[OK].  
2 Touch the desired icon to appear on the  
map.  
The current name appears in the text box  
(when available). Delete the current name,  
and enter a new name between 1 and 22 char-  
acters long.  
3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch  
[Yes].  
The details you set are registered, and the  
Address Book menu appears.  
Alternative options:  
The Address Information menu appears.  
You cannot change the icon of your home  
or of your favorite location.  
No:  
Jump to the pronunciation input screen.  
Repeat:  
Customizing the picture  
You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the  
name you entered.  
Be sure to read “Limitations for import the  
picture” before creating the CD-R (-RW).  
No sounds can be output during  
.
When you confirm the pronunciation,  
is shown on the left side of the location  
name displayed in the Address Book  
menu. This mark indicates that this name  
can be used as a voice command during  
voice operation.  
Page 97  
You can customize a picture for the registered  
point. Some pictures are already stored in the  
hard disk drive, and you can also import JPEG for-  
mat pictures, such as a picture on your digital  
camera by using CD-R(-RW). If you burn the pic-  
tures into a CD-R (-RW) by your PC and insert  
that to the navigation system, you can use them.  
You cannot change the name of your  
home.  
If nothing is entered in the text box, you  
cannot use that item as the voice com-  
mands.  
Here, a method for changing the picture is  
described with an example of loading a picture  
stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation sys-  
tem.  
Entering or changing a phone number  
1 Touch [Phone #].  
1 Check that no disc is inserted, and insert  
2 Input a phone number, then touch [OK].  
The Address Information menu appears.  
To change a registered phone number,  
delete the existing number and then enter  
a new one.  
your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.  
2 Touch [Picture], and then touch [Import  
from Disc].  
The list of the pictures stored in a CD-R (-RW)  
is displayed.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
item:  
Back to Original:  
The picture originally used when the system  
was purchased is selected.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touching other than [Import from Disc]  
allows you to select an image stored on the  
hard disk drive.  
Deleting Address Book informa-  
tion  
Items registered in the Address Book can be  
deleted. All entries of the data in the Address  
Book can be deleted at once.  
3 Touch a picture you want to set.  
4 Touch [Yes].  
On this screen, you can select the following  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
items:  
menu, then touch [Address Book].  
No:  
2 Touch [Delete].  
This is selected when you want to change to  
another picture. Return to Step 3.  
“Address Book Delete screen” appears. (or  
“Destination Delete screen” appears.)  
Selecting sound  
3 Select the location you want to delete.  
A check mark appears by the selected loca-  
tion.  
1 Touch [Sound].  
2 Select the desired sound.  
To turn off the sound, select [No Sound].  
3 Touch [Sound] to hear the sound.  
4 Touch [Set].  
No sounds can be output during  
.
On this screen, you can select the following  
Changing the position of locations  
items:  
All:  
1 Touch [Modify Location].  
The map of the selected area and its sur-  
roundings appears.  
Selects all locations.  
None:  
Displayed when all locations are being  
selected. Cancels all selected locations.  
2 Touch the screen to change its position,  
then touch [OK].  
4 Touch [Delete].  
5 Select [Yes].  
The data you selected is deleted.  
Alternative option:  
No:  
The display shown in Step 4 appears.  
Because deleted data cannot be restored,  
take extra care not to delete by mistake.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Destination History Operations  
The points to which route has been calculated in  
the past are automatically saved in Destination  
History.  
If no location is stored in Destination History,  
you cannot select [Destination History]. (If  
you perform a route calculation, you can  
select [Destination History].)  
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation  
menu, then touch [Destination History].  
(2)  
(3)  
(1)  
(1) Destination history:  
Touch to calculate the route. The route guid-  
ance screen appears.  
(2) [Delete]:  
Deletes the registered location.  
Page 64  
(3) [Back]:  
Returns previous screen.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Using Traffic Information  
Using XM NavTraffic Informa-  
tion  
Viewing traffic list  
Traffic Information is displayed onscreen in a list.  
This allows you to check how many traffic inci-  
dents have occurred, their location, and their dis-  
tance from your current position.  
If you have a GEX-P10XMT XM Digital Satellite  
Data & Audio Receiver (sold separately) attached  
to the navigation system, and have an active sub-  
scription to XM NavTraffic service, you can view  
current traffic conditions and information on your  
navigation display. When the unit receives  
updated traffic information, the navigation sys-  
tem will overlay the traffic information on your  
map, and also display detailed text information  
when available. When you are traveling along a  
route and there is traffic information on your cur-  
rent route, the system will detect it, and ask you if  
you would like to be rerouted, or suggest another  
route automatically.  
Checking traffic information  
Traffic information except traffic flow information  
is displayed onscreen in a list.  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, then touch [Traffic Events].  
The list with received traffic information is  
shown.  
2 Touch or to view the incident list.  
Places (street names) where incidents have  
occurred are displayed in the list.  
The system acquires the traffic information in  
the range between 20 miles and 100 miles in  
diameter from the vehicle position. (Accord-  
ing to the amount of traffic information  
acquired at the same time, the reception  
range is automatically adjusted in the range  
between 20 miles and 100 miles with your  
vehicle at the center.)  
(1)  
(2) (4)  
(5)  
(3)  
The navigation system provides the following  
functions by using the information from XM  
NavTraffic:  
(7)  
(6)  
(1) Street or place  
(2) Direction  
• Displaying a list of traffic information  
• Displaying traffic information on a map  
• Suggesting a route to avoide traffic con-  
gestion by using traffic information  
(3) Incident  
(4) Distance to the location  
(5) The incident numbers currently dis-  
played and the total number of incidents  
The incidents that have already been read  
will be displayed in white. Unread inci-  
dents will be in yellow.  
The term “traffic congestion” in this section  
indicates the following types of traffic informa-  
tion: stop and go, stopped traffic, closed/  
blocked roads. This information is always  
taken into consideration when checking your  
route, and the information related with these  
events cannot be turned off. If you select other  
traffic information in [Traffic Settings], the  
information can be displayed in a list or on a  
map.  
(6) Sort key  
:
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-  
betical order.  
:
You can sort the traffic information by dis-  
tance from your current position.  
Page 70  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
For the list displayed when you touch [Traffic  
Events], the list will be sorted according to  
the linear distance from the vehicle position to  
the traffic information.  
The method for checking the content dis-  
played on the screen is the same for  
“Checking traffic information”.  
Checking traffic flow information on the  
list  
The traffic flow information on the route can also  
For the list displayed when you touch [Traffic  
On Route], the list will be sorted according to  
the distance from the vehicle position to the  
traffic information.  
be displayed as an onscreen list.  
:
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, then touch [Traffic Flow].  
The list with the traffic flow information is  
shown.  
You can sort the traffic information according  
to the incident.  
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/  
blocked roads, traffic congestion, accidents,  
road works, and others.  
(mph):  
You can sort the traffic information by the  
average speed.  
:
When new traffic information is received, cur-  
rent information is changed, or old informa-  
tion has been removed, the list is updated to  
reflect the new situation.  
The other methods for checking the traffic  
flow information displayed on screen is the  
same for “Checking traffic information”.  
(7)  
Confirming traffic information  
on the map  
Touching  
allows you to check the location  
on a map. (Traffic information without posi-  
tional information cannot be checked on a  
map.)  
A line displayed only when the map scale  
is 2.5 mile (5 km) or lower.  
Icon appears only when the scale on the  
map is 10 mi (20 km) or lower. (If the scale  
is 1 mi (2 km) or higher, the icons are  
resized smaller.)  
3 Select an incident you want to view in  
detail.  
The details of the selected incident are dis-  
played.  
Traffic-related items are not displayed on  
“City Map”.  
• Touching an incident you want to see  
allows you to view the detailed information  
of the incident. If the information cannot be  
displayed on one screen, touch or to  
view the remaining information.  
Traffic event icon and line  
The traffic event information displayed on the  
map is as follows.  
Traffic event icon  
4 Touch [Back] to return to the list with  
traffic information.  
A list with traffic information appears again.  
Checking traffic information on the  
route  
All traffic information on the current route  
(including traffic flow information) is displayed  
onscreen in a list.  
with yellow line:  
Stop and go traffic  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Traffic On Route].  
The currently set traffic information on the  
route appears on screen.  
with red line:  
Stopped traffic  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting alternative route to  
avoid traffic congestion  
with black line:  
Closed/blocked roads  
The navigation system checks at certain time  
intervals whether or not there is the traffic infor-  
mation on your route. If the navigation system  
detects any traffic congestion on your current  
route, the system tries to find a better route in the  
background.  
etc.:  
For the meaning of the icon, see [Traffic Set-  
tings] in the Information menu.  
Page 70  
If you want to check the traffic information details  
at the map, move the scroll cursor onto an icon  
Following types of traffic incidents on the  
route will be checked: stop and go, stopped  
traffic and closed/blocked roads.  
such as  
and touch . This allows you to view  
place names and other detail information.  
The traffic flow information is taken into  
account when the traffic flow is not selected  
in [Traffic Settings].  
Traffic flow information icon and line  
Red, yellow, or green blinking lines may appear  
on either side of a road. In addition to these blink-  
ing lines, a round icon with a number may appear  
on the map. The number in the icon indicates the  
actual average speed of that specific area. These  
colors indicate the average speed at which traffic  
is flowing along these streets. Here is a guide to  
the colors and the average speed they indicate:  
Checking traffic congestion automati-  
cally  
If there is information of traffic congestion on  
your current route and if an alternative route can  
be found, the navigation system will recommend  
you new alternative route automatically. In such  
case, the following screen will appear.  
There is no action if the system cannot find  
any traffic congestion information on your  
route or the system cannot find an alternative.  
Red: average speed in this area is between 5  
mph to 15 mph (8 km/h to 24 km/h)  
Yellow: average speed in this area is between 20  
mph to 40 mph (32 km/h to 64 km/h)  
Green: average speed in this area is 45 mph (72  
km/h) or faster (An icon without a number indi-  
cates the average speed of the road is more than  
45 mph (72km/h))  
Distance from the current position of  
your vehicle to the point of entry into  
the new route.  
Difference in distance and travel time  
between existing route and new route.  
The traffic flow line can be used only when  
On this screen, you can select the following  
[Traffic Settings] is selected.  
items:  
New:  
Page 70  
The recommended route is displayed on the  
screen.  
If you want to check the traffic information details  
at the map, move the scroll cursor onto an icon  
Current:  
The current route is displayed on the screen.  
such as  
and touch . This allows you to view  
OK:  
place names and other detail information.  
The displayed route is set.  
When no selection is made, the current route  
will be automatically selected after a short  
while.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The traffic information displayed on the  
notification icon is the traffic information  
on the route closest to the vehicle position.  
If you touch [Detour], the route is recalcu-  
lated by taking into account not only this  
information, but also all traffic congestion  
information on the route.  
Checking traffic information manually  
Touching notification icon on the map screen  
allows you to check traffic information on your  
route while icon is displayed. Only if there is any  
traffic information on your route, notification icon  
is displayed on the navigation map screen.  
Notification icon will not appear when your  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
vehicle deviate from route.  
Traffic flow information is not taken into  
account if [Traffic Flow] in [Traffic Set-  
tings] is not checked.  
List:  
Only the three most recent events are listed  
for the traffic information on your route.  
Back:  
1 Set [Show Traffic Incidents] to [View].  
Displayed InformationPage 68  
The message disappears, and the map display  
reappears.  
For the subsequent operations, see “Checking  
traffic congestion automatically”.  
map” Page 68  
2 Press the MAP button to display the cur-  
rent location.  
The icon appears when the system acquires  
traffic information on the current route.  
3 Touch icon during the icon is displayed.  
Selecting traffic information to  
display  
Notification icon  
There are different types of traffic information  
that can be received via the XM NavTraffic ser-  
vice, and you can select which types will be incor-  
porated and displayed on your navigation system.  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Traffic Settings].  
The displayed icon indicates the type of the  
traffic information.  
2 Touch [Displayed traffic information].  
The names of the displayed traffic information  
items and a list of icons appears on the  
screen.  
4 Touch [Detour] to search alternative  
route.  
Only if the system can find the information  
related traffic congestion, [Detour] will be  
enable.  
After touching [Detour], the route is recalcu-  
lated taking all traffic congestion on your cur-  
rent route into account.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Touch the traffic information item to dis-  
play.  
A red check appears next to the selected traf-  
fic information.  
[Flow Info] includes not only whether or  
not to display the icon on the map, but also  
whether or not to take the flow information  
into account when rerouting.  
Touching [ALL (None)] selects or deselect  
all traffic information.  
4 Touch [OK].  
The selected traffic information icon is added  
to the screen.  
The following types of traffic congestion  
cannot be deselected and are always dis-  
played and taken into consideration: stop  
and go, stopped traffic, and closed/  
blocked roads.  
5 Touch [Back].  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Using XM Tuner and Other Information  
You can switch the upper line to input the  
number and marks.  
Using the XM Tuner to View  
Stock, Sports, and Other Infor-  
mation  
The method for inputting the text is almost  
same as for inputting street names.  
Text input method Page 27  
When an XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected,  
you can receive stock price, sports and other  
information, and display it onscreen. You may  
also register favorite information on the naviga-  
tion system.  
If the input ticker symbol does not match  
in full the actual ticker symbol for the  
stock, you may not be able to find it.  
Deleting stocks to be displayed  
onscreen  
Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks. If 12  
stocks are already registered, delete as many  
entries as necessary to add new stocks.  
Displaying stock prices  
Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks.  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Stock Info].  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Stock Info].  
2 Touch [Delete].  
3 Touch the ticker of the stock you want to  
delete.  
A red check appears next to the ticker you  
touched.  
The screen displays a list of stock prices.  
Although the stock price information dis-  
played onscreen is updated every 30 sec-  
onds (approx.), these prices are not real-  
time values.  
To delete all registered stocks, touch [All].  
Red checks will appear next to all tickers.  
4 Touch [Delete].  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
Registering stocks to be displayed  
5 Touch [OK].  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Stock Info].  
2 Touch [Add].  
3 Input the Ticker text for the stocks you  
want to display, then touch [OK].  
[0-9], [Punc.], [Oper], [Sym.]:  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Displaying browsable informa-  
tion  
Displaying favorite browsable  
Information  
XM special contents can be assigned as a short-  
cut or [My Favorites] so that it can be accessed  
without searching every time an update is  
needed. The following are the instructions on  
how to do it:  
The displayed items depend on the informa-  
tion which is sent from each station.  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, then touch [Browse].  
The screen will display a list of categories. The  
information appearing onscreen is automati-  
cally updated at regular intervals.  
1 Store the desired item (topic).  
Displaying browsable information ➞  
Page 74  
2 Touch a category you want to browse  
from the list.  
2 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [My Favorites].  
A list of registered items (topics) appears on  
the screen. Touch the item to display informa-  
tion about this item.  
3 Touch the topic you wish to view.  
Deleting favorite browsable information  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [My Favorites].  
2 Touch [Delete].  
4 Touch an item (a topic) to display the con-  
tents.  
3 Touch the name of the items you want to  
delete.  
Submenu :  
A red check appears next to the items you  
touched.  
Displays the submenu. If there is no submenu  
for the contents, the [Submenu] will be invisi-  
ble.  
To delete all favorite contents, touch [All].  
Red checks will appear next to all items.  
Store :  
Registers the current item (topic) about which  
information is displayed as a favorite.  
Confirming your favorite information ➞  
Page 74  
4 Touch [Delete].  
5 A message will appear asking you to con-  
firm the deletion. Touch [OK].  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Checking the Reception Status  
of the XM Tuner  
Emergency Info  
The Emergency Info screen provides important  
emergency information pertaining to your vehi-  
cle, insurance, and current location. Such emer-  
gency information could be useful in the event of  
an accident or vehicle breakdown. The accuracy  
of the personal information is dependent on the  
accuracy of the information entered into the navi-  
gation system by the user.  
The current XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT) reception  
status and signal strength appear on screen. (The  
information that is transmitted via XM DATA  
cable is displayed in this screen.)  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [XM Status].  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
• The Emergency Info screen is only  
intended to provide information to a driver  
that may be useful during an emergency  
situation, and does not replace the need to  
call for emergency assistance, when nec-  
essary.  
(1) Status  
Depending on the XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT)  
reception status, any one of the following may  
appear.  
Checking the information regis-  
tered as Emergency Info  
OK  
No problem.  
Updating  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
Updating encryption code.  
Check antenna  
Improper antenna connection.  
Not Connected  
menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].  
(1)  
(2)  
(2) Signal Strength  
Depending on the signal strength, any one of the  
following may appear.  
Very Strong  
Strong  
Marginal  
(4)  
(3)  
(5)  
Weak  
The information registered as Emergency  
No signal  
Info appears on the screen.  
(3) Radio ID  
The radio ID appears.  
(1) You are currently at :  
Your current position is indicated by the street  
If you have subscribed to either XM audio only  
or XM NavTraffic stand alone, you will see  
[Updating] in the [Status]. This is because  
the GEX-P10XMT is constantly checking to see  
if you have decided to add the other service  
while your navigation system is turned on. If  
you subscribe to both services, appropriate  
status will be shown in the [Status].  
name, latitude, and longitude.  
(2) Personal Information :  
Your VIN number, insurance policy number, and  
the telephone number of your insurance com-  
pany can be displayed once entered by the user.  
(3) Emergency TOW service phone :  
The phone number of the subscribing Emergency  
TOW service can be displayed once entered by  
the user. The default or factory setting is the  
phone number of the Emergency Roadside Assis-  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
tance service provided by Signature’s Nationwide  
Auto Club, Inc.  
Dialing the correspond number in emer-  
gency  
1 year of free Emergency Roadside  
Assistance service  
This function can be valid only when all fol-  
lowing conditions are satisfied:  
1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assistance  
service is available to all registered owners and  
provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,  
Inc. The first year of Emergency Roadside Assis-  
tance service is paid for by Pioneer only if your  
navigation system is registered with Pioneer and  
you sign up on-line with Signature’s Nationwide  
Auto Club, Inc. at the time you register your navi-  
gation system with Pioneer. If you have not  
signed up for this service with Signature’s  
Nationwide Auto Club, Inc., or if your free one-  
year period has expired, you are subject to  
charges by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,  
Inc. You are also subject to be changed by Signa-  
ture’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc. for roadside  
services not included in the Emergency Roadside  
Assistance service. The terms and conditions  
regarding the Emergency Roadside Assistance  
service provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto  
Club, Inc. are determined solely and exclusively  
by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc. Please  
contact Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc.  
for more information. The telephone number that  
appears here by default is the toll free number for  
this service. For additional details on registering  
for this service, please check your product regis-  
tration card included with this product. If you are  
not interested in the free Roadside Assistance  
service, this number can be edited and replaced  
by your own roadside assistance telephone num-  
ber.  
• The Bluetooth unit (sold separately) is  
connected with navigation system.  
• The communication for Hands-free phon-  
ing is activate between the cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth technology and the  
navigation system.  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, then touch [Emergency Info].  
2 Touch  
.
A list of telephone numbers appears  
onscreen.  
3 Touch the phone number you want to  
dial.  
The signal is transmitted to the selected  
phone number.  
The police number is shown as 911 and can-  
Touching  
terminates the call.  
not be changed.  
Touch [Back] to return to the previous  
screen.  
(4) Locate Car Service  
Page 77  
(5) Dial each number  
gency” Page 76  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Touch the selection method.  
Searching for car service in an  
emergency  
In an emergency, you can search the Emergency  
Info for Auto Services in the vicinity of your cur-  
rent position and set the current route.  
• The Emergency Info screen is only  
intended to provide information to a driver  
that may be useful during an emergency  
situation and if they are in a safe location.  
If not, or in all major accidents, call 911  
directly.  
Select All  
Selects all detailed categories included in that  
category.  
Deselect All  
Cancels the selected detailed categories.  
Select Detail  
Selects a detailed category from the list.  
If you want to search with more detailed  
categories, touch [Select Detail]. When  
the subcategory list appears, touch the  
item and touch [Back]. When only a few  
types of the detailed categories are  
selected, blue check marks will appear.  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, then touch [Emergency Info].  
2 Touch [Locate Car Service].  
5 Repeat Step 3 and 4, select a category,  
and touch [OK].  
The POI in the selected category or detailed  
category is searched.  
A list of auto services appears onscreen.  
6 Touch the name of the facility to set the  
route you want.  
3 Touch the Category of the auto service  
you want to use.  
A red check appears next to the selected cate-  
gory.  
Displays the route to the selected facility.  
The Auto Service categories that can be  
selected in the Emergency Info are: [Auto-  
motive] and [Car Dealer].  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Edit TOW Service Phone  
Registering user information  
Register a towing company’s phone number.  
If touch [Default], and then TOW service  
phone number restore default number.  
Prepare the vehicle inspection certificate or  
insurance certificate, and input the information  
written on it.  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
Setting the Vehicle Dynamics  
Display  
menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].  
2 Touch [Setup].  
You can change the content of meter on the left  
and right of the Vehicle Dynamics Display.  
Until the sensor’s initial learning is complete,  
only the voltage and clock are available.  
3 Touch the desired item to register your  
information.  
The speed displayed is a guideline and may  
not correspond to the actual speed.  
1 Switch to the Vehicle Dynamics Display.  
Changing the map display mode ➞  
Page 37  
If information is already registered, that  
2 Touch the left or right meter.  
Touch keys are displayed.  
information will appear.  
4 Input the number you wish to register,  
then touch [OK].  
3 Touch the items you want to display.  
Completes the registration.  
You can select the following items.  
Voltage :  
Edit VIN  
Displays the power supply and voltage sup-  
plied from the battery to this system.  
Acceleration :  
Register your Vehicle’s Identification Number.  
(You can enter between 1 and 17 digits.)  
Edit Policy Number  
Acceleration in a forward direction is dis-  
played. The + sign indicates acceleration  
while the – sign indicates deceleration.  
Side Acceleration :  
Register your insurance policy number.  
Acceleration in a side direction such as when  
turning, is displayed. The + sign indicates a  
right turn, while the – sign indicates a left  
turn.  
Angular Velocity :  
Displays the vehicle’s turning angle over one  
second (how far it has turned in a second).  
Slope :  
Edit Insurance Phone  
Register your insurance company’s phone  
number.  
Displays the vehicle’s vertical movement. The  
+ side represents the rising angle, and the –  
side the falling angle.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Direction :  
The direction your vehicle is traveling in is dis-  
played.  
Clock :  
Current time is displayed.  
Adjust Look :  
Touch [Adjust Look] to display a screen for  
selecting the panel pattern. Touch one of the  
patterns from among those displayed onscreen  
to change the panel to the selected pattern.  
If you touch [Peak Hold Reset], the maxi-  
mum and minimum (green line) values  
indicated in [Acceleration] and [Side  
Acceleration] are reset.  
You cannot change the speedometer at the  
center.  
Selecting Demo Mode in the Settings  
menu enables you to perform a demon-  
stration with random values.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Using Hands-free Phoning  
Please read “Notes for hands-free phoning”  
Hands-free Phoning Overview  
for your reference.  
“Notes for hands-free phoning” Page 89  
When the power of the navigation system  
turns off, Bluetooth is also disconnected.  
When the system restarts, the system auto-  
matically attempts to reconnect the cellular  
phone previously connected. Even when the  
connection is cut for some reason, the system  
automatically reconnects the specified cellu-  
lar phone (except for the case where the con-  
nection is cut by the cellular phone  
• For your safety, avoid talking on the phone  
as much as possible while driving.  
If your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth tech-  
nology, this navigation system can be connected  
to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using this  
hands-free function, you can operate the naviga-  
tion system to make or receive phone calls. You  
can also transfer the phone book data stored in  
your cellular phone to the navigation system.  
This section describes how to set up a Bluetooth  
connection, and how to operate a cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth technology on the navigation  
system.  
operation).  
You can open [Phone Menu] directly to press  
and hold the MENU button.  
The following description assumes that the  
device name of the cellular phone to be con-  
nected using Bluetooth wireless technology is set  
to [My Mobile Phone].  
Preparing communication  
devices  
You can check the signal strength for connec-  
tion between your cellular phone and Blue-  
tooth unit with [Connection Status] in  
[Hardware] Menu.  
To use the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology on the navigation system,  
the Bluetooth adapter (ND-BT1) (sold separately)  
is required.  
[Connection Status] Page 93  
You can set the voice volume and ring volume  
with [Volume] in Settings Menu.  
Precautions on using a cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth technology  
[Volume] Page 91  
You can set to mute peripheral sounds during  
By connecting the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa-  
rately), you can use the functions described  
in this manual, including hands-free phoning  
or address book transfer. To use these func-  
tions, the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology that you want to connect  
must have a supported profile that is the  
same as the profile for the Bluetooth unit. For  
the supported profile, refer to the owner’s  
manual of the Bluetooth unit.  
hands-free phoning.  
[Mute Set] Page 155  
While your mobile phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology is connected,  
played on the map.  
is dis-  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5 Touch [Navi].  
Setting up for hands-free phon-  
ing  
The system searches the cellular phones  
Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the  
connection and displays them in the list.  
Before you can use the hands-free phoning func-  
tion, you will need to set up the navigation system  
for using that function. This entails registering  
your cellular phone with the navigation system  
and establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection  
between the navigation system and your cellular  
phone.  
6 Wait until your mobile phone appears in  
the list.  
If you cannot find the cellular phone you  
want to connect, check that the cellular  
phone is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless  
technology connection.  
Registering your cellular phone  
You need to register your cellular phone featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology when you connect  
it for the first time. A total of five phones can be  
registered. Two registration methods are avail-  
able:  
7 Select the cellular phone you want to reg-  
ister from the list.  
8 Enter the password of the navigation sys-  
tem to register it using your cellular  
phone.  
• Registration from the navigation system  
• Registration from the cellular phone  
After the registration is completed, the follow-  
ing screen appears.  
Once you registered that phone, you can  
select that cellular phone from the list to con-  
nect it without registration.  
Page 83  
The default device name displayed on the cel-  
lular phone is [PIONEER NAVI]. The default  
password is [1111].  
If registration fails, repeat the procedure  
from the beginning. If a connection still  
cannot be established, try connecting  
using your cellular phone.  
Operating from the navigation system  
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technor-  
ogy on your mobile phone.  
Operating from your cellular phone  
For some mobile phone no specific action is  
necessary in activation for Bluetooth wireless  
technorogy. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your mobile phone.  
9 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technor-  
ogy on your mobile phone.  
For some mobile phone no specific action is  
necessary in activation for Bluetooth wireless  
technorogy. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your mobile phone.  
2 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
3 Touch [Phone Settings].  
10Touch [Information] in the navigation  
The phone settings screen appears.  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
4 Touch [Registration].  
11Touch [Phone Settings].  
The phone settings screen appears.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
12Touch [Registration].  
2 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
3 Touch [Phone Settings].  
The phone settings screen appears.  
Phone name currently connected or  
selected as a target of connection  
13Touch [Mobile].  
The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth  
wireless technology connection.  
14Operate your cellular phone to register  
the navigation system.  
4 Touch [Connection].  
If your cellular phone asks you to enter a pass-  
word, enter the password of the navigation  
system.  
5 Touch a cellular phone name you want to  
connect.  
After the registration is completed, the follow-  
ing screen appears.  
When a connection is successfully estab-  
lished, a connection complete message  
appears, and the system returns to the phone  
menu screen.  
To cancel the connection to your cellular  
phone, touch [Cancel].  
If connection fails, check whether your cel-  
lular phone is waiting for a connection,  
and then repeat the procedure from step 4.  
If registration fails repeat the procedure  
from the beginning.  
Editing the device name  
You can change the device name to be displayed  
Connecting a registered cellular phone  
The navigation system automatically connects  
the cellular phone selected as a target of connec-  
tion. However, connect the cellular phone manu-  
ally in the following cases:  
on your cellular phone. (Default is [PIONEER  
NAVI].)  
6 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
• Two or more cellular phones are registered,  
and you want to manually select the cellular  
phone to be used.  
7 Touch [Phone Settings].  
The phone settings screen appears.  
• You want to reconnect a disconnected cellular  
phone.  
8 Touch [Device Name].  
• Connection cannot be established automati-  
cally for some reason.  
9 Touch any key to enter the name you  
want to set and then touch [OK].  
About Keypad operation Page 27  
Up to 20 characters can be entered for a  
device name.  
Unregistered cellular phones cannot be con-  
nected.  
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technor-  
ogy on your mobile phone.  
Editing the password  
You can change the password to be used for  
For some mobile phone no specific action is  
necessary in activation for Bluetooth wireless  
technorogy. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your mobile phone.  
authentication on your cellular phone. (Default is  
[1111].)  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10Touch [Information] in the navigation  
2 To end the call, touch  
of the screen.  
at the top right  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
The call ends.  
11Touch [Phone Settings].  
If the received voice is too quiet to hear, you  
The phone settings screen appears.  
can adjust the volume of the received voice.  
12Touch [Password].  
Incoming Voice Page 91  
Depending on the subscription status of the  
caller ID service, the phone number of the  
received call may not be displayed, and  
[Unknown] appears instead.  
13Touch any key to enter the password you  
want to set and then touch [OK].  
About Keypad operation Page 27  
Four to eight characters can be entered for  
a password.  
You may hear a noise when you hang up the  
phone.  
Receiving a phone call  
Making a phone call  
You can use the navigation system to receive a  
call hands-free.  
You can make a phone call in many different  
ways.  
The map screen shows the icon while your cellu-  
lar phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technol-  
ogy is connected. You can recieve a hands-free  
call only when the mobile phone is connected.  
Direct dialing  
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation  
Connecting icon  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
2 Touch [Dial].  
The phone settings screen appears.  
3 Input the phone number, and then touch  
to make a call.  
Answering an incoming call  
The system informs you that it is receiving a call  
by displaying a message and producing a ring  
sound once.  
1 When there is an incoming call, touch  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
.
ing, touch  
.
4 To end the call, touch  
of the screen.  
at the top right  
When there is an incoming call, you can reject  
the call by touching  
.
During a call, the  
is displayed at the  
right-hand side of the screen.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dialing from the dialed number history  
or the received call history  
Calling a number in the Phone Book  
After finding the list in the Phone Book you want  
to call, you can select the number and make the  
call.  
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
Before using this function, you need to trans-  
fer the phone book stored in your cellular  
phone to the navigation system.  
2 Touch [Dialled Numbers] or [Received  
Calls].  
The list of either one appears.  
“Transferring the phone book” Page 87  
3 Touch a name or telephone number from  
the list to make a call.  
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
Date and time of the call dialed or received  
2 Touch [Phone Book].  
The phone book screen appears.  
3 Touch a name from the list to make a call.  
If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to  
the first page of the contacts whose names  
start with that letter.  
4 Touch  
to make a call.  
To cancel the call, touch  
.
Touch the entry in the list to make a call.  
To cancel the call, touch  
.
4 To end the call, touch  
of the screen.  
at the top right  
When you make a call to the phone num-  
ber in [Received Calls] without “+”, you  
can add “+” in front of that number by  
touching [+]. To delete “+”, touch [+]  
again in that time.  
Calling a number in the Dial Favorites  
After finding the list in the Dial Favorite you want  
to call, you can select the number and make the  
call.  
5 To end the call, touch  
right of the screen.  
at the top  
Before using this function, you need to set the  
phone number from the phone book to Dial  
Favorite.  
Up to 30 entries for each of the dialed  
number and received call histories are  
recorded automatically. When the number  
of entries exceeds 30, the entries will be  
deleted from the oldest one.  
Registering the phone number to Dial Favorite  
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation  
You can clear the dialed number or  
received call history.  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
Clearing the dialed number or received call  
2 Touch [Dial Favorite].  
The Dial Favorite screen appears.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Touch one of [Favorite 1] to [Favorite 5] to  
make a call.  
3 Touch  
to make a call.  
Touch the entry to make a call.  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
.
4 To end the call, touch  
of the screen.  
at the top right  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
Dialing the entry in the Address Book  
You can make a call to the entry registered in the  
address book.  
.
4 To end the call, touch  
of the screen.  
at the top right  
You cannot make a call to locations if phone  
number is not registered.  
Dialing from the map  
1 Display the Address Book.  
Operation of the Address Book Page 61  
You can make a call by selecting an icon of a reg-  
istered location or a POI icon from the map  
screen.  
2 Touch  
of the entry you want to call.  
to make a call.  
The detail screen appears.  
You cannot make a call to locations or POIs  
that have no phone number data.  
3 Touch  
1 Scroll the map, and point the cursor on an  
icon on the map.  
2 Touch  
.
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
.
4 To end the call, touch  
of the screen.  
at the top right  
The detail screen appears.  
Dialing a facility’s phone number  
You can make a call to facilities with phone num-  
ber data.  
3 Touch  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
to make a call.  
.
1 Perform [POI Search] or [Vicinity Search]  
and display the detail information.  
4 To end the call, touch  
of the screen.  
at the top right  
Operation of [POI Search] Page 51  
Operation of [Vicinity Search] Page 53  
2 Touch  
of the entry you want to call.  
The detail screen appears.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[No]:  
Transferring the phone book  
Stay the current entries and then adds new  
data to the phone book. (Duplicate data can-  
not be consolidated.)  
You can transfer the data from the phone book*  
stored in your cellular phone to the phone book  
stored in the navigation system.  
If you want to keep the existing phone  
book, select [No].  
By transferring the phone book to the navigation  
system, you can browse the data in the trans-  
ferred phone book on the screen of the navigation  
system. You can also select the entries in the  
phone book to make a call from the navigation  
system or edit the data on the navigation system.  
4 Check that the following screen is dis-  
played, and operate your cellular phone to  
transfer the phone book entries.  
The phone book entries in your cellular phone  
are transferred to the navigation system. To  
cancel the transfer, touch [Cancel].  
Only the names and telephone numbers  
can be transferred.  
Depending on the cellular phone, “Phone  
Book” may be called by “Contacts”, “Business  
card”.  
The Phone Book can hold a total of 400  
The transferred data can be edited on the  
navigation system.  
entries.  
The Hands-free phoning connection is discon-  
nected to establish the connection for phone  
book transfer. When the phone book is trans-  
ferred, hands-free phoning is reconnected  
automatically.  
Editing a phone book data Page 88  
Registering a phone number in  
Dial Favorite  
You can register up to five entries in the phone  
book. Registering the phone numbers that you  
frequently use in Dial Favorite will ease the dial-  
ing operation. The names registered in Dial  
Favorite can be operated from the shortcut menu.  
You can also use Voice Recognition to make a  
call by saying the phone number.  
The phone book of this navigation system can-  
not assign the multiple telephone numbers for  
one person’s name.  
1 Connect your cellular phone featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
Page 82  
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation  
2 Touch [Information] in the Navigation  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
2 Touch [Dial Favorite].  
3 Touch [Read Bus. Card].  
3 Touch [Set].  
If there is a phone book already transferred,  
the following screen appears.  
The Phone book screen appears.  
4 Touch the entry you want to register in  
Favorite.  
The Phone book Record screen appears.  
5 Touch [OK].  
The selected entry is registered in the corre-  
sponding Dial Favorite.  
[Yes]:  
Deletes all phone numbers stored in the  
phone book, and then transfers the data.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Customizing a picture for phone book  
record  
Editing the Phone Book data  
You can edit the imported phone book data or  
add new data. You can edit [Name], [Phone  
number], or [Picture]. You can also delete  
unnecessary data.  
Be sure to read “Limitations for import the pic-  
ture” before creating the CD-R (-RW).  
“Limitations for import the picture” ➞  
The data cannot be transferred back to the  
Page 97  
cellular phone.  
You can customize a picture for the phone book  
record. Some pictures are already stored in the  
hard disk drive, and you can also import JPEG for-  
mat pictures, such as a picture on your digital  
camera by using CD-R(-RW). If you burn the pic-  
tures into a CD-R (-RW) by your PC and insert  
that to the navigation system, you can use them.  
Here, a method for changing the picture is  
described with an example of loading a picture  
stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation sys-  
tem.  
Adding new data  
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
2 Touch [Phone Book].  
3 Touch  
or [Add].  
The edit screen appears.  
To add data by entering it as desired, touch  
[Add].  
4 Select the entry you want to edit.  
1 Check that no disc is inserted, and insert  
your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.  
2 Touch [Picture], and then touch [Import  
from Disc].  
The list of the pictures stored in a CD-R (-RW)  
is displayed.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
item:  
[Name] or [Phone #]:  
Back to Original:  
Enter the name and the phone number to be  
displayed in the phone book. Touch [OK] to  
complete the input and return to the previous  
screen.  
The picture originally used when the system  
was purchased is selected.  
Touching other than [Import from Disc]  
allows you to select a background image  
stored on the hard disk drive.  
About Keypad Operation Page 27  
The name can be input 40 characters long  
and phone number can be input 32 char-  
acters long.  
3 Touch a picture you want to set.  
The edited names and phone numbers are  
reflected to the dialed number history and  
the received call history. However, they are  
not reflected to the data registered in [Dial  
Favorite].  
4 Touch [Yes].  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
No:  
This is selected when you want to change to  
another picture. Return to Step 3.  
[Picture]:  
Sets the image to be displayed when a call is  
received.  
Customizing a picture for phone book  
5 Touch [OK].  
The selected data is added to the phone book.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Deleting data  
Deleting data  
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation  
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
2 Touch [Phone Book].  
2 Touch [Dialled Numbers] or [Received  
Calls].  
3 Touch [Delete].  
The Phone Book Delete screen appears.  
3 Touch [Delete].  
4 Touch the entry you want to delete.  
A red check mark appears next to the selected  
entry. To cancel the selection, touch the entry  
again.  
4 Touch [Yes].  
All history data is deleted, and the current  
location screen appears.  
To cancel the deletion, touch [No].  
Notes for hands-free phoning  
General notes  
• Connection to all cellular phones featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology is not guaran-  
teed.  
• The line-of-sight distance between this naviga-  
tion system and your cellular phone must be  
10 meters or less when sending and receiving  
voice and data via Bluetooth technology. How-  
ever, the transmission distance may become  
shorter than the estimated distance, depend-  
ing on the environment in use.  
5 Touch [Delete].  
6 Touch [Yes].  
The data is deleted, and the current location  
screen appears.  
To cancel the deletion, touch [No].  
• You cannot delete the registered cellular  
phone. If you need to delete it, refer to “Return-  
ing the Navigation System to the Default or  
Factory Settings”, and delete it together with  
other functions.  
Editing the received call or  
dialed number history  
You can edit the data in the dialed number history  
or the received call history. You can edit [Name],  
[Phone number], or [Picture]. The edited  
entries are registered in the phone book. You can  
also delete the history data.  
• With some mobile phones, the speakers of the  
system may not produce a ring sound.  
• If the private mode is selected on the cellular  
phone, hands-free phoning may not be per-  
formed.  
Editing data  
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation  
About registration and connection  
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].  
• Operation of cellular phone varies depending  
on the type of your cellular phone. Refer to the  
instruction manual that came with your cellu-  
lar phone for detailed instructions.  
2 Touch [Dialled Numbers] or [Received  
Calls].  
3 Touch  
.
About making and receiving calls  
• You may hear a noise in the following situa-  
tions:  
The edit screen appears. Steps after this are  
the same as for editing the phone book.  
Editing the Phone Book data Page 88  
The phone number cannot be edited if it is  
already registered in the phone book.  
— When you answer the phone by using the  
button on the phone.  
— When the person on the other end of line  
hangs up the phone.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• With some cellular phones, even if you press  
accept button on the cellular phone when a  
call arrives, hands-free phoning may not be  
performed.  
• The registered name appears if the phone  
number of the received call is already regis-  
tered in the phone book. When one phone  
number is registered under different names,  
the name that starts with the alphabet that pre-  
cedes that of the other is displayed.  
• If the phone number of the received call is not  
registered in the phone book, the phone num-  
ber of the received call appears.  
About received call history and dialed num-  
ber history  
• Calls made or editing performed only on your  
cellular phone will not be reflected to the  
dialed number history, or phone book in the  
navigation system.  
• You cannot make a call to the entry of an  
unknown user (no phone number) in the  
received call history.  
• If calls are made by operating your cellular  
phone, no history data will be recorded in the  
navigation system.  
About phone book transfer  
• With some cellular phones, it may not be pos-  
sible to transfer all items in the phone book at  
one time. In this case, transfer item one by one  
from your cellular phone.  
• Depending on the cellular phone that is con-  
nected to this navigation system via Bluetooth  
technology, this navigation system cannot dis-  
play the phone book correctly. (Some charac-  
ters may be garbled or first name and last  
name is put in reverse order.)  
• If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, phone book may not be cor-  
rectly transferred. (Image data cannot be  
transferred from the cellular phone.)  
Depending on the cellular phone, phone book  
transfer cannot be available.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10  
Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions  
Guidance  
This setting controls the guidance volume of  
• For safety reasons, these functions are not  
available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop  
in a safe place and put on the parking  
brake before setting your route (see page  
18 Interlock for details).  
navigation.  
When you set this to  
, a guidance is out-  
, no guidance is  
put. When you set this to  
output.  
Beep  
This setting controls the beep tone volume of  
navigation.  
Phone Ringtone  
Entering the Settings Menu  
This setting controls the incoming ring tone  
volume.  
1 Press the MENU button to display the  
navigation menu.  
Phone Voice  
This setting controls the incoming voice vol-  
ume.  
2 Touch [Settings] to display the Settings  
menu.  
The Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice  
adjustments are related to the cellular  
phone featuring BT technology. No adjust-  
ment is needed when the cellular phone  
featuring BT technology is not connected.  
Volume of the audio source is adjusted by  
the VOL (ꢀ/ꢁ) button of the navigation  
system.  
3 Change the setting.  
Adjusting each item Page 91 to 98  
This section describes the details of the  
setting for each item. Settings marked with  
an asterisk (*) show that they are default or  
factory settings.  
3 To finish the setting, touch [OK].  
Setting the Volume Related to  
the Guidance and Phone  
Customizing the Regional Set-  
tings  
The sound volume for the navigation can be set.  
You can separately set the volume of the route  
guidance and the beep sound.  
Changing the language for navi-  
gation guidance and menu  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Volume].  
You can select the language to be used for the  
navigation function. (Once you change the lan-  
guage, the program restarts.)  
2 Touch [+] or [–] to set their volume.  
On this screen, you can operate the following  
items.  
• Once the installation of the program starts,  
do not stop the engine of your vehicle and  
do not switch off the navigation system  
until the installation is completed and the  
map of your surroundings appears.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
The time difference can be set from +3 to –3  
hours.  
then touch [Regional Settings].  
2 Touch [Language].  
4 If necessary, set to summer time.  
Daylight Saving Time (DST) is off by default.  
Touch [Summer Time] to change the time if  
you are in the daylight saving period. This  
turns the display below summer time [On].  
3 Touch the language which you want to  
use.  
Once you change the language, the program  
restarts.  
5 To finish the setting, touch [OK].  
Touching [Back] returns you to the previ-  
ous display.  
If you select [English with TTS], the  
name of the next street you will pass is  
vocally announced. If you select [English  
without TTS], the name of the next street  
you will pass is not vocally announced.  
Customizing the keyboard lay-  
out  
You can select the type of keyboard to be used for  
inputting characters.  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
Setting the time difference  
then touch [Regional Settings].  
Adjusts the systems clock. The time difference  
(+, ) between the time originally set in your navi-  
gation system is set here.  
2 Touch [Keyboard] to select the layout  
which you want to use.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
You can also select summer time On/Off.  
QWERTY:  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Regional Settings].  
2 Touch [Time].  
3
To set the time difference, touch [+] or [].  
QWERTZ  
Time difference  
ABC:  
The time difference between the time origi-  
nally set in the navigation system (Pacific  
Standard Time) and the current location of  
your vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the  
time difference. Touching [+] or [] changes  
the time difference display in one-hour incre-  
ments.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
AZERTY:  
Checking the Setting Related  
with Hardware  
The hardware status, including the driving status  
of a vehicle, positioning status by satellite, learn-  
ing status of the 3D sensor, and cable connection  
status etc., can be checked.  
Changing the measure for dis-  
play  
Checking the connections of  
leads and installation positions  
This setting controls the unit of distance dis-  
played on your navigation system.  
Check that leads are properly connected between  
the navigation system and the vehicle. Please  
also check whether they are connected in the  
correct positions.  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Regional Settings].  
2 Touch [km / mile] to change the setting.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Hardware].  
ting.  
mile*:  
Show distance in miles.  
Mile & Yard:  
2 Touch [Connection Status].  
The Connection Status screen appears.  
Show distance in miles and yards.  
km:  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
Show distance in kilometers.  
Changing the virtual speed of  
vehicle  
When calculating expected time of arrival and the  
number of hours to the destination, set the aver-  
age speed for the freeway or ordinary roads using  
[+] and [–].  
(1) Speed Pulse  
The Speed Pulse value detected by the naviga-  
tion system is shown. [0] is shown while the  
vehicle is stationary.  
(2) GPS Antenna  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
Indicates the connection status of the GPS  
antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from  
how many satellites the signal is received. If  
the signal is received correctly, [OK] is dis-  
played. If reception is poor, [NOK] appears. In  
such case, please change the installation  
position of the GPS antenna.  
then touch [Regional Settings].  
2 Touch [Average Speed].  
3 Touch [+] or [–] to set their speed.  
(3) Phone Connection Status  
Indicates the connection status of the Blue-  
tooth unit and the signal strength of cellular  
phone. If the connection of Bluetooth unit is  
correctly, [OK] is displayed. [NOK] appears  
when the Bluetooth unit is not connected or  
incorrectly connected.  
The estimated time of arrival is not neces-  
sarily estimated based on this speed value.  
Signal strength may differ from the actual  
signal strength on the cellular phone.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Depending on the cellular phones featur-  
ing Bluetooth technology, signal strength  
is not available.  
Checking sensor learning status  
and driving status  
(4) Installation Position  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Hardware].  
The installation position of the navigation sys-  
tem is shown. That indicates whether the  
installation position of the navigation system  
is correct or not. If installed correctly, [OK]  
appears. When the navigation system is  
installed at an extreme angle exceeding the  
limitation of the installing angle, [Incorrect  
angle] will be displayed. When the angle of  
the navigation system has been changed,  
[Excessive vibration] will be displayed.  
(5) Parking Brake  
2 Touch [3D Calibration Status].  
The 3D Calibration Status screen appears.  
(5)  
(4)  
(1)  
(6)  
(7)  
(2)  
(3)  
When the parking brake is applied, [On] is dis-  
played. When the parking brake is released,  
[Off] is displayed.  
(1) Distance  
Driving distance is indicated.  
(2) Speed Pulse  
(6) Power Voltage  
Total number of speed pulses is indicated.  
(3) Learning Status  
The power voltage (reference value) provided  
from the vehicle battery to the navigation sys-  
tem is shown. If the voltage goes out of the  
range from 11 to 15V, check that power cable  
connection is correct.  
Current driving mode is indicated.  
(4) Degree of learning  
Sensor learning situations of distance (Dis-  
tance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn (Left  
Turn), and 3D detection (3D) are indicated by  
the length of bars.  
(7) Illumination  
When the headlights or small lamps of a vehi-  
cle are on, [On] is displayed. Small lamps of a  
vehicle are off, [Off] is displayed. (If the  
orange/ white lead is not connected, [Off]  
appears.)  
When tires have been changed or chains  
fitted, turning on the Speed Pulse allows  
the system detects the fact that the tire  
diameter has changed, and automatically  
replaces the value for calculating distance.  
If the ND-PG1 is connected, the distance  
calculation value cannot be replaced auto-  
matically.  
(8) Back Signal  
When the gear lever is shifted to [R], the sig-  
nal switches to [High] or [Low]. (Either of  
these is displayed depending on the vehicle.)  
(5) Speed  
Speed detected by the navigation system is  
indicated. (This indication may be different  
from the actual speed of your vehicle, so  
please do not use this instead of the speedom-  
eter of your vehicle.)  
(6) Acceleration or deceleration/Rota-  
tional speed  
Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your  
vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed  
when your vehicle turns to left or right is  
shown.  
(7) Inclination  
Degree of slope of the street is indicated.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Hardware].  
To clear values...  
If you want to delete the learned results stored in  
[Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Sta-  
tus], touch the relevant result, then touch [Yes].  
2 Touch [Installation Angle Setup].  
3 Check the direction the LCD panel faces,  
and touch the corresponding item.  
If you select [Learning Status], you can  
select [Reset All] or [Reset Distance  
Study]. To clear all learning statuses, touch  
[Reset All]. To clear only the Distance study,  
touch [Reset Distance Study].  
Touch [Reset All] for the following cases:  
• When you changed the installation position  
of the navigation system  
Left:  
• When you changed the installation angle of  
the navigation system  
Select this when the angle is 5° or more to the  
left from the center.  
• When you moved the navigation system to  
another vehicle  
Center:  
Select this when the angle is less than 5° to  
When the distance accuracy is low, touch  
the left, and less than 5° to the right from the  
center.  
[Reset Distance Study].  
Touching [Reset All] returns the installation  
angle setting also to the default or factory set-  
ting. Reconfigure the setting.  
Right:  
Select this when the angle is 5° or more to the  
right from the center.  
If the [Learning Status] in the [3D Cali-  
bration Status] is [Simple hybrid], the  
installation angle can be corrected.  
Correcting the installation angle Page 95  
The navigation system can automatically use  
its sensor memory based on the outer dimen-  
sions of the tires.  
Checking the device and version  
information  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Hardware].  
Correcting the installation angle  
You can correct the installation angle of the navi-  
gation system. Correcting the installation angle  
improves the accuracy of sensor learning, even if  
the unit is not facing center. Select the orienta-  
tion of the LCD panel from the left, center, and  
right.  
2 Touch [Service Info Screen].  
3 Check the device and version information.  
Checking the hard disk informa-  
tion  
You can check the volume of the hard disk, cur-  
rent used space and remaining space.  
The hard disk space (%) means a free space of  
the music library. In some cases, even when  
about 10% of free space is left, no more music  
track may be recorded due to system restric-  
tion.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Hardware].  
4 Point the scroll cursor to the location you  
want to register and touch [OK].  
The location is registered, and the Edit regis-  
tered information screen appears.  
“Editing a location’s information” ➞  
Page 61  
2 Touch [Hard Disk Info].  
Hard disk space (%)  
5 Touch [OK].  
Completes the registration.  
Changing the Background Pic-  
ture  
Registering the Home Location  
and Favorite Location  
Be sure to read “Limitations for import the pic-  
ture” before creating the CD-R (-RW).  
You can register one home location and one  
favorite location. You can change the registered  
information later. You might find it useful to regis-  
ter your workplace or a relative’s home as your  
favorite location.  
Page 97  
In the menu operation screen, you can customize  
a picture for the background. Some pictures are  
already stored in the hard disk drive, and you can  
also import JPEG format pictures, such as a pic-  
ture on your digital camera by using CD-R(-RW).  
If you burn the pictures into a CD-R (-RW) by your  
PC and insert that to the navigation system, you  
can use them as background pictures.  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Defined Locations].  
2 Touch [Go to].  
When registering your home location, touch  
[Home].  
The following two types of background pictures  
can be changed:  
Navigation Background: Background pic-  
ture of navigation menu screen.  
AV Background: Background picture during  
the operation of audio source screen.  
Here, a method for changing the background pic-  
ture is described with an example of loading a  
picture stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the naviga-  
tion system as the background picture.  
3 Search for a location to register.  
You can select a method of location search.  
1 Check that no disc is inserted, and insert  
your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.  
2 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Background Picture Setting].  
The picture selected for each screen is indi-  
cated on the right side of [Navigation Back-  
ground] and [AV Background] items.  
Address Search Page 26  
Information on searching locations to reg-  
If you select [Map Search], move the  
scroll cursor to the place you want to set  
and touch [OK].  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Touch [Navigation Background] or [AV  
Background].  
Limitations for import the picture  
When you burn a CD-R (-RW), make sure the  
total data size of the CD-R (-RW) is greater than  
100MB by storing dummy data or the like. If  
not, the disc may not be recognized with the  
built-in DVD drive.  
4 Touch [Import from Disc].  
You cannot use a CD-R (-RW) containing MP3  
files or the Audio data part (CD-DA part) for  
importing pictures.  
When storing pictures on a CD-R (-RW), cre-  
ate a folder named “Pictures” in the CD-R (-  
RW), and store the picture files in this folder.  
(Up to 200 picture files can be used in total  
including pictures are already stored in the  
hard disk drive and pictures in the CD-R (-  
RW).)  
The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (-  
RW) is displayed.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
item:  
When you burn a CD-R (-RW), limit the num-  
ber of folder hierarchy levels to eight.  
Back to Original:  
The picture originally used when the system  
was purchased is selected.  
You can only use single-session format for  
importing pictures.  
Touching other than [Import from Disc]  
allows you to select a background image  
stored on the hard disk drive.  
Only JPEG format (“.jpg” or “.JPG”) pictures  
can be used. Progressive format JPEG pic-  
tures cannot be used.  
5 Touch a picture you want to set.  
You can only use standard characters (alpha-  
bets of both cases: A-Z, a-z) and numbers (0-9)  
for the file name (international (accented)  
characters cannot be used).  
6 Touch [OK].  
Pictures up to a maximum of 2 592 x 1 944 pix-  
els can be used. We cannot guarantee proper  
operation for a picture bigger than this size.  
If you touch [OK], the background image  
starts changing. After a short while, the con-  
firmation screen appears.  
If you want to change to another picture,  
touch [Back] to return to Step 4.  
When the picture starts to change, do not  
turn off the vehicle engine until the mes-  
sage appears to indicate that the picture  
has finished changing.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Demonstration Guid-  
ance  
This is a demonstration function for shops. After  
a route is set, the simulation of the route guid-  
ance to a destination is automatically displayed.  
Normally, set this to [Off].  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu.  
2 Touch [Demo Mode] to change the set-  
ting.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
On:  
Repeat demo drive.  
Off*:  
Demo Mode is set off.  
Correcting the Current Location  
Touch the screen to adjust the current position  
and direction of the vehicle displayed on the map.  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Modify Current Location].  
2 Scroll the position where you want to set,  
then touch [OK].  
3 Touch the arrow key on the screen to set  
the direction, then touch [OK].  
Restoring the Default Setting  
Reset various settings registered to the naviga-  
tion system and restores to the default or factory  
settings.  
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,  
then touch [Restore Factory Settings].  
2 Touch [Yes] to clear the current setting.  
Touch [Back] to cancel clear the current  
setting.  
Default or Factory Settings” Page 175  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 11  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
You can play or use the following sources with  
Selecting a source  
the navigation system.  
• DVD-Video  
• CD  
1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper-  
ation screen.  
• MP3 disc  
2 Touch the source icon to select the  
desired source.  
• Radio (FM)  
• Radio (AM)  
• Music Library  
Source icon  
About the music library Chapter 12  
This chapter describes how to use the audio  
source and the basic operation of the audio  
source.  
Basic Operation  
Switching the Audio operation  
screen  
1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper-  
ation screen.  
You can also press the AV button to switch  
the source.  
Press the AV button repeatedly to switch  
between the following sources:  
[CD/ROM (MP3)/DVD] (built-in DVD drive)  
— [LIBRARY] (Music library) — [FM] (FM  
tuner) — [AM] (AM tuner) — [XM] (XM tuner)  
— [SIRIUS] (SIRIUS tuner) — [iPod] (iPod)  
— [M-CD] (multi-CD) — [TV] (television) —  
[AV INPUT] (video input) — [AUX] (Auxiliary  
equipment) — [EXT 1] (external unit 1) —  
[EXT 2] (external unit 2)  
Touch [OFF] to turn the source off.  
(1)  
In the following cases, the sound source can-  
not to be used:  
— When a unit corresponding to each source  
is not connected to the navigation system.  
— When no disc is set in the navigation sys-  
tem.  
(1) Touch panel keys  
Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel keys.  
If you touch the screen, the touch panel  
keys are displayed again.  
— When no magazine is set in the multi-CD  
player.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
— When [AUX Input] (auxiliary input) is set to  
ꢀꢁ button:  
Same function as P.LIST (/) button.  
[Off].  
— When [AV Input] (video input) is not set to  
ꢂꢃ button:  
Same function as TRK (/) button.  
[Video].  
The term “external unit” refers to future Pio-  
neer devices that are not currently planned  
for, or although devices are not fully con-  
trolled by this navigation system, devices  
enable control of basic functions. Two exter-  
nal units can be controlled by this navigation  
system. When two external units are con-  
nected, the navigation system allocates them  
to external unit 1 or external unit 2.  
+, - button:  
Same function as VOL (/) button.  
BAND button:  
Same function as [Band] touch key.  
SOURCE button:  
Same function as AV button.  
When the [Auto ANT] mode is set to  
[Radio], the vehicle’s antenna can be stowed  
by following the instructions below.  
— Change the source from radio (AM or FM)  
to another source.  
— Turn the source off.  
— Turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF).  
If the [Auto ANT] mode is set to [Power], the  
vehicle’s antenna can be stowed only when  
the ACC is set to “OFF”.  
[Auto ANT] Page 156  
About Steering Remote Control  
If you operate using the “CD-SR1” Steering  
Remote Control (sold separately), the follow-  
ing buttons can be used for operation:  
PHONE MENU button  
Switches to Phone menu when Bluetooth unit  
(sold separately ) is connected.  
VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button  
Press to accept the call when there is an incom-  
ing call.  
In other situation, press to start the voice opera-  
tion.  
VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button  
Press to reject a call when there is an incoming  
call.  
Press to hang up the phone during talking on the  
phone.  
In voice operation, return to the previous screen.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to see the audio operation screen and how to display the Audio  
Settings menu  
Normal screen (e.g. CD)  
(1)  
Touch  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(8)  
(1) Information plate  
Displays the information (e.g. track title, etc.) about the source being played.  
(2) Touch panel keys  
Touch to operate the source being played.  
(3) Detailed information  
Displays the detailed information about the source being played.  
(4) AV Settings key  
Displays the AV Settings menu.  
(5) Hide key  
Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel keys and detailed information. If you touch the screen, they  
are displayed again.  
(6) Audio Settings tab  
Switches the setting items to those for Audio Settings.  
(7) System Settings tab  
Switches the setting items to those for System Settings.  
(8) Setting Items  
Customizing the Audio Setting Related with Audio Visual Chapter 16  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating the Music CD  
Screen configuration  
(3)  
(1) (4) (2)  
(5)  
You can play a normal music CD using the built-  
in DVD drive of the navigation unit. This section  
describes that operations.  
(7)  
(6)  
Selecting [CD] as the source  
1 Press the OPEN button and insert a disc  
you want to play to disc loading slot.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
(8)  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
If the disc is already set, touch the source  
icon and then touch [CD].  
(2) Disc title indicator  
Shows the disc title currently playing. (when  
For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞  
Page 99  
available.)  
When being read in, Checking disc is dis-  
(3) Playback method indicator  
Shows which playback method has been  
played.  
selected.  
About auto hard disk recording  
(4) Track indicator  
Shows the track number currently playing.  
Navigation system can record the tracks of music  
CD into the hard disk drive.  
(5) Track title indicator  
Shows the track title currently playing. (when  
In default setting, the system starts recording  
automatically when the unrecorded music CD is  
inserted.  
available.)  
(6) Artist name indicator  
Shows the artist name currently playing. (when  
If you want to cancel the recording, touch [Stop].  
Stop  
available.)  
(7) Play time indicator  
Shows the playback time of the current track.  
(8) Track list  
Shows tracks of the CD currently playing.  
Title display  
Music recognition technology and related data  
Setting the hard disk recording mode ➞  
are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the  
industry standard in music recognition technol-  
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-  
mation visit www.gracenote.com.  
Page 156  
A title information will be displayed when the  
information is found in the Gracenote® Data-  
base on the built-in hard disk drive.  
Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc” in  
the Hardware Manual for more cautions  
about handling each media.  
When multiple options of title information is  
find or no title information exists, [] is dis-  
played. A title may be displayed if you update  
the title information manually after recording  
has finished.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
If no title information exists in the Gracenote®  
Database on the built-in hard disk drive, the  
date when the track was recorded is entered  
automatically. If you want to display the title  
information, enter the title manually after  
recording has finished.  
(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-  
ward  
Touching skips to the start of the next track.  
Touching once skips to the start of the cur-  
rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-  
ous track.  
Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward  
Keep touching or to perform fast rewind  
or forward.  
Changing the title of the playlist or track ➞  
Page 122  
The title information displayed on the CD play-  
back screen and the recording screen is syn-  
chronized with the one edited in the music  
library. If you edit the title information in the  
music library, the title displayed on each  
screen will change accordingly.  
You can also perform these operations by  
using the TRK (/) button.  
Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches the  
beginning of the first track on the disc.  
(4) Using to stop playback  
When you stop playback by touching , that  
When playing a CD TEXT disc, the list lets you  
track number on the disc is memorized enabling  
playback from that track when you play the disc  
again.  
see the track titles encoded in CD TEXT disc.  
— Some discs have text information encoded  
on the disc during manufacture. These  
discs may contain such information as the  
CD title, track title, artist’s name and are  
called CD TEXT discs.  
To play the disc again, touch .  
(5) Repeat the current track  
Each touch of  
turn the repeat play on or off.  
[Track Repeat] is displayed on the playback  
The maximum umber of characters are 32  
characters. But the navigation system incor-  
porates the proportional font. Therefore, the  
number of the characters which you can dis-  
play varies according to which of each charac-  
ter.  
method indicator during the track repeat.  
If you perform track search or fast forward or  
rewind, repeat play is automatically canceled.  
(6) Playing tracks in a random order  
Touching  
turns the random play on or off.  
If the built-in DVD drive does not operate prop-  
(7) Scanning tracks of a CD  
Touching  
erly, an error message may be displayed.  
turns the scan play on or off.  
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of  
each track on the CD. When you find the desired  
Error messages Page 188  
track touch  
to turn scan play off.  
Touch key operation  
After scanning of a CD is finished, normal  
Touch keys  
playback of the tracks will begin again.  
(3)  
(3)  
(2)  
(4)  
(1)  
(5) (6)  
(7)  
(1) Selecting a desired track from the list  
Touch a desired track to play.  
(2) Playback and Pause  
Touching switches between [playback] and  
[pause].  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
track.  
Operating the CD-ROM (MP3 disc)  
You can play a MP3 disc using the built-in DVD  
drive of the navigation unit. This section  
describes that operations.  
(7) Folder and track list  
Shows contents of the folder currently playing or  
temporarily displayed.  
(8) Bit rate  
Shows bit rate of the file currently playing.  
Selecting [ROM] as the source  
1 Press the OPEN button and insert a disc  
you want to play to disc loading slot.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
Touch key operation  
Touch keys  
(3) (6) (5)  
If the disc is already set, touch the source  
icon and then touch [ROM].  
For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞  
Page 99  
(3)  
(2)  
(4)  
When being read in, Checking disc is dis-  
(10)  
played.  
Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc” in  
the Hardware Manual for more cautions  
about handling each media.  
(1)  
(7) (8) (9)  
(1) Selecting tracks from the list or viewing  
contents of the folders  
The list lets you see the list of track titles or folder  
Screen configuration  
names on a disc. If you touch a folder on the list,  
you can view its contents. If you touch a track on  
the list, you can play the selected track.  
(1)  
(3) (4)(5)(8)  
(2)  
(6)  
Touching or switches to the next or previous  
page in the list.  
If the selected folder does not contain any  
track which can be played, the track list is not  
displayed.  
(7)  
(2) Playback and Pause  
Touching switches between [playback] and  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
[pause].  
(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-  
ward  
Touching skips to the start of the next track.  
(2) Playback method indicator  
Shows which playback method has been  
selected.  
Touching once skips to the start of the cur-  
rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-  
ous track.  
(3) Folder indicator  
Shows the folder number and folder name cur-  
rently playing.  
Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward  
Keep touching or to perform fast rewind  
or forward.  
(4) Track indicator  
Shows the track number and track title currently  
playing.  
You can also perform these operations by  
using the TRK (/) button.  
(5) Artist name indicator  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
fast rewind is canceled when it reaches the  
beginning of the first track on the disc.  
(6) Play time indicator  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
In the case of MP3, there is no sound on fast  
If you select another folder or perform fast for-  
ward/rewind during Folder Repeat, the  
repeat play is cancelled. (You can perform  
track search within that folder with Folder  
repeart.)  
rewind or forward.  
(4) Using to stop playback  
When you stop CD or MP3 disc playback by  
touching , that track number on the disc is  
memorized enabling playback from that track  
when you play the disc again.  
When Folder Repeat is selected, it is not  
possible to play back a subfolder of that  
folder.  
To play the disc again, touch .  
(9) Playing tracks in random order  
(5) Selecting upper folder  
Touching  
switches between on and off the  
Touching  
to move the upper folder and  
tracks are randomly played within selected repeat  
range.  
playback the first track on that folder. If the folder  
contain no MP3 files, the contents of that folder is  
shown.  
(10) Scanning folders and tracks  
Touching  
turns the scan play on or off.  
If the current folder is the ROOT folder,  
Scan play will be performed for the selected  
repeat range.  
can not be used.  
(6) Switching mode between MP3 and music  
CD (CD-DA) part  
When playing discs with MP3 files and audio  
In default, the beginning of the first track of  
each folder will be played for about 10 sec-  
onds. When [Folder Repeat] is selected for  
repeat play, the beginning of each track in the  
selected folder will play for about 10 seconds.  
When you find the desired track, touch  
to turn scan play off.  
data (CD-DA) such as CD EXTRA and MIXED-  
MODE CDs, both types can be played only by  
switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA.  
Touching [Media] switches between CD-DA part  
and MP3 part.  
After track or folder scanning is finished, nor-  
(7) Displaying text information on MP3 disc  
Text information recorded on a MP3 disc can be  
mal playback of the tracks will begin again.  
displayed.  
The next piece of information is displayed.  
Disc Title (disc title)*  
Track Title (track title)*  
Folder Title (folder name)  
File Name (file name)  
Artist Name (artist name)*  
Genre (genre)*  
Notes on playing MP3 disc  
When playing discs with MP3 files and audio  
data (CD-DA) such as CDEXTRA and MIXED-  
MODE CDs, both types can be played only by  
switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA.  
When playing back the CD-DA part, the opera-  
tion is the same as for normal music CDs.  
Likewise, when playing back the MP3 part, the  
operation is the same as for MP3. When you  
operate it, refer to the instruction for each  
media.  
Release Year (release year)*  
The information marked with an asterisk (*)  
only when ID3 tag has been encoded on MP3  
files on the disc. If specific information of the  
ID3 tag has not been encoded on MP3 files on  
disc, the correspond item may be blank.  
If you have switched between playback of MP3  
files and audio data (CDDA), playback starts  
at the first track on the disc.  
(8) Repeating play  
Each touch of  
changes the settings as fol-  
Playback is carried out in order of file number.  
Folders are skipped if they contain no MP3  
files. (For example, if folder 001 (ROOT) con-  
tains no MP3 files, playback commences with  
folder 002.)  
lows:  
Track Repeat — Repeat just the current track  
Folder Repeat — Repeat the folder currently  
playing  
If you select another track or perform fast for-  
ward/rewind during Track Repeat, the  
repeat play is cancelled.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When playing back files recorded as VBR  
(variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be  
correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse  
operations are used.  
Operating the DVD  
• For safety reasons, “Video image”s cannot  
be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.  
To view “Video image”s, you must stop in  
a safe place and put on the parking brake  
before setting your route (see page 18  
Interlock for details).  
If you are using a folder that does not contain  
an MP3 file, the folder itself will display but  
you will not be able to see or play any files in  
that folder.  
The maximum umber of characters are 32  
characters including extension (.mp3). But  
the navigation system incorporates the pro-  
portional font. Therefore, the number of the  
characters which you can display varies  
according to which of each character.  
You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in DVD  
drive of the navigation system. This section  
describes operations for DVD-Video.  
If the built-in DVD drive does not operate prop- Selecting [DVD] as the source  
erly, an error message may be displayed.  
1 Press the OPEN button and insert a disc  
Error messages Page 188  
you want to play to disc loading slot.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
If the disc is already set, touch the source  
icon and then touch [DVD].  
Page 99  
Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc”  
and “Playable discs” in the Hardware Manual  
for more cautions about handling DVD-Video.  
Screen configuration  
(1)  
(4)(6) (5) (7) (3) (8)  
(9)  
(2)  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
(2) Sound output indicator  
Shows which sound output setting has been  
selected.  
(3) Repeat range indicator  
Shows which repeat range has been selected.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
(4) Title number indicator  
Shows the title number currently playing.  
(1) Playback and Pause  
Touching switches between [playback] and  
[pause].  
(5) Subtitle language indicator  
Shows what subtitle language has been selected.  
(2) Touch: Skip the chapter forward or back-  
ward  
Touching skips to the start of the next chap-  
(6) Chapter number indicator  
Shows the chapter currently playing.  
ter. Touching once skips to the start of the  
current chapter. Touching again will skip to the  
previous chapter.  
(7) Audio language indicator  
Shows what audio language have been selected.  
(8) Viewing angle indicator  
Shows what viewing angle has been selected.  
Touch and hold: fast rewind or forward  
Keep touching or to perform fast rewind  
(9) Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
or forward. If you keep touching or for  
five seconds, the icon or changes into  
chapter.  
or  
. When this happens, fast rewind/ fast  
forward continues even if you release or  
. To resume playback at a desired point,  
touch .  
Touch key operation  
Playback screen (page1)  
You can also perform these operations by  
(2)  
(4)  
using the TRK (/) button.  
(3) Using to stop playback  
(4) Displaying the DVD menu  
You can display the menu by touching [Menu] or  
(2)  
(1)  
(3)  
[Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touching  
either of these keys again lets you start playback  
from the location selected from the menu. For  
details, refer to the instructions provided with the  
disc.  
(7)  
(6)  
(5)  
Playback screen (page2)  
(8)  
(5) Displaying the DVD menu keypad  
(6) Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-  
motion playback)  
Touch and hold to start slow-motion playback.  
(9)  
(11)  
Touching this during playback pauses the image  
and each touch forwards a frame.  
(12)  
(14)  
To return to normal playback, touch .  
With some discs, images may be unclear dur-  
ing frame-by-frame playback or slow motion  
playback.  
(10)  
(13)  
Menu screen  
There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
Reverse slow motion playback is not possible.  
(15)  
(16)  
(7) Switching next page of touch keys  
(8) Repeating play  
Each touch of the  
changes the settings as  
follows:  
With some discs, the icon  
may be dis-  
Chapter Repeat — Repeat just the current  
chapter  
Title Repeat — Repeat just the current title  
played, that operation is not valid.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you perform chapter (title) search, fast for-  
ward/rewind, or slow motion playback, the  
repeat play range changes to off.  
(16) Using to decide the item  
When you select a certain video item, play-  
back starts from the selected item. When you  
select the item with submenu, next menu  
screen will appear.  
(9) Changing the subtitle language (Multi-  
subtitle)  
Each time you touch [Subtitle] switches  
The way to display the menu differs  
depending on the disc. For details, refer to  
the instructions provided with disc.  
between subtitle language.  
(10) Changing the viewing angle (Multi-  
angle)  
Each time you touch [Angle] switches between  
Searching for a desired scene,  
starting playback from a speci-  
fied time  
viewing angle.  
During playback of a scene shot from multiple  
angles, the angle icon  
is displayed. Turn  
You can search for a desired scene by specifying  
a title or a chapter, and the time.  
angle icon display on or off using “DVD-V  
Setup” menu.  
Chapter search and time search are not possi-  
Setting angle icon Page 152  
ble when disc playback has been stopped.  
(11) Changing audio language and audio sys-  
tems (Multi-audio)  
Each time you touch [Audio] switches between  
1 Touch [10Key Search] and then touch  
[Title] (title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time]  
(time).  
audio language and audio system.  
Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If  
navigation system’s optical digital outputs are  
not connected, DTS audio can not be output,  
so select an audio setting other than DTS.  
Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch  
indicate the audio system recorded on the  
DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may  
not be with the same audio system as that  
indicated.  
2 Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired number.  
For titles, chapters  
• To select 3, touch 3.  
(12) Specifying the chapter you want to play  
back or time to start playback by entering a  
number  
• To select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order.  
• To select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order.  
For time (time search)  
“Searching for a desired scene, starting play-  
back from a specified time” Page 108  
• To select 21 minutes 03 seconds, touch [2],  
[1], [Min], and [3], [Sec] in order.  
• To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [Min] in order.  
(13) The operation (such as resuming) stored  
in the disc will be performed  
When using a DVD that has a point recorded that  
To cancel the input numbers, touch  
[Clear].  
indicates where to return to, the DVD returns to  
the specified point and begins play back from  
that point.  
3 While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
(14) Switching previous page of touch keys  
(15) Selecting the DVD menu item  
This starts playback from the selected scene.  
With discs featuring a menu, you can also  
touch [Menu] or [Top Menu] and then  
make selections from the displayed menu.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Entering the numerical com-  
mands  
Operating the Radio (FM)  
You can listen to the radio by using the navigation  
system. This section describes operations for  
Radio (FM).  
You can use this function when you need to enter  
a numerical command during DVD playback.  
1 Touch [10Key search] and then touch  
Selecting [FM] as the source  
[10key Mode] (10key mode).  
1 Touch the source icon and touch [FM].  
Page 99  
2 Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired number.  
For titles, chapters or 10key mode  
3 While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
Screen configuration  
(1)  
(2)  
(3) (4) (7)  
(6)  
(5)  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
(2) Band indicator  
Shows which band the radio is tuned to FM1 to  
FM3.  
(3) Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset has been selected.  
(4) Frequency indicator  
Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.  
(5) Preset list display  
Shows the preset list.  
(6) LOCAL indicator  
Shows when local seek tuning is on.  
(7) STEREO indicator  
Shows that the frequency selected is being  
broadcast in stereo.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
(3) Tuning in strong signals  
Touch key operation  
1 Touch the source icon and then touch  
[FM] to select the radio (FM).  
(4) Storing the strongest broadcast frequen-  
cies  
When the source icon is not displayed, you  
can display it by touching the screen.  
cies” Page 112  
Touch keys  
(5) Select a FM band  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired FM  
band is displayed, FM 1, FM 2 or FM 3.  
(2)  
(4)  
This function is convenient to prepare differ-  
ent preset list for each band.  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
(1)  
(5) (3)  
(1) Touch: Selecting a desired frequency  
from the list  
Touch to recall the preset frequency.  
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automati-  
cally store the six strongest broadcast frequen-  
cies under preset tuning keys P1 P6 and once  
stored there you can tune in to those frequencies  
with a touch of the key.  
To register the frequency currently being  
received to the preset list, touch and hold the  
preset list.  
1 Touch and hold [BSM].  
Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations  
You can register the frequency currently being  
BSM starts. The six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies will be stored under preset tuning  
keys P1 P6 in order of their signal strength.  
To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Cancel].  
received to the preset list. You can easily store up  
to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with  
the touch of a key.  
Touch to recall the preset frequency.  
Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have saved using P1 P6.  
Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three FM  
bands can be stored in memory.  
(2) Touch: Perform manual tuning  
To perform manual tuning, touch  
Tuning in strong signals  
or  
briefly. The frequencies move up or  
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those  
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for  
good reception.  
down step by step.  
Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, keep touching  
1 Touch [Local].  
or  
for about one second and release.  
The tuner will scan the channels until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is found.  
2 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
You can cancel seek tuning by touching either  
3 Touch or to set the sensitivity.  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.  
Level: 1 2 3 4  
or  
briefly.  
If you keep touching  
or  
, you  
can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning  
starts as soon as you release the keys.  
The level [4] setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings let  
you receive weaker stations.  
You can also perform these operations by  
using the TRK (/) button.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Operating the Radio (AM)  
Touch key operation  
1 Touch the source icon and then touch  
[AM] to select the radio (AM).  
You can listen to the radio by using the navigation  
system. This section describes operations for  
Radio (AM).  
When the source icon is not displayed, you  
can display it by touching the screen.  
Selecting [AM] as the source  
Touch keys  
1 Touch the source icon and touch [AM].  
Page 99  
(2)  
(4)  
Screen configuration  
Radio (AM)  
(1)  
(3)  
(1)  
(2) (3)  
(5)  
(1) Selecting a desired frequency from the  
list  
Touch to recall the preset frequency.  
To register the frequency currently being  
received to the preset list, touch and hold the  
preset list.  
Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations  
You can register the frequency currently being  
(4)  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
received to the preset list. You can easily store up  
to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with  
the touch of a key.  
(2) Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset has been selected.  
Touch to recall the preset frequency.  
Up to 6 stations can be stored in memory.  
(2) Touch: Perform manual tuning  
(3) Frequency indicator  
Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.  
(4) Preset list display  
Shows the preset list.  
To perform manual tuning, touch  
briefly. The frequencies move up or  
down step by step.  
or  
(5) LOCAL indicator  
Shows when local seek tuning is on.  
You can also perform manual tuning by press-  
ing the TRK (/) button.  
Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, keep touching  
or  
for about one second and release.  
The tuner will scan the channels until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is found.  
You can cancel seek tuning by touching either  
or  
briefly.  
If you keep touching  
or  
, you  
can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning  
starts as soon as you release the keys.  
You can also perform seek tuning by keep  
pressing the TRK (/) button.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
(3) Tuning in strong signals  
(4) Storing the strongest broadcast frequen-  
cies  
cies” Page 112  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automati-  
cally store the six strongest broadcast frequen-  
cies under preset tuning keys P1 P6 and once  
stored there you can tune in to those frequencies  
with the touch of a key.  
1 Touch and hold [BSM].  
BSM starts. The six strongest broadcast frequen-  
cies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 —  
P6 in order of their signal strength.  
To cancel the storage process, touch [Can-  
cel].  
Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may  
replace broadcast frequencies you have saved  
using P1 P6.  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those  
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for  
good reception.  
1 Touch [Local].  
2 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
3 Touch or to set the sensitivity.  
There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.  
Level: 1 2  
The level [2] setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings let  
you receive weaker stations.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 12  
Using the AV Source (Music Library)  
You can record tracks from a music CD to the  
hard disk in the navigation system. The music  
library function enables you to record music CDs  
on the hard disk in the navigation system and  
play them back in various methods. To use the  
music library, start by recording sound sources  
from the CD.  
(4) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
(5) Track indicator  
Shows the track number and track title currently  
playing.  
(6) Artist name indicator  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
(7) Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
Music Library Recording  
track.  
When you play back a music CD that is not  
recorded on the navigation system, the system  
automatically begins recording that CD to the  
music library. This section describes cautions  
and recording procedure.  
(8) Track list  
Shows tracks of the CD.  
(9) Record status of tracks  
: Recorded track  
(Red): Track being recorded  
The music library can record up to 200 general  
music CDs worth of music data. (This is just  
an average number and varies depending on  
the size of music data contained in the CDs.)  
(Blue): Track is not recorded yet  
Track selection operation or special playback  
functions such as random play are disabled  
until recording finishes. To select tracks or  
perform special playback functions, touch  
[Stop] to stop recording.  
CD recording screen (e.g. Auto mode)  
(4) (1)  
(2)  
(6)  
(7)  
(3)  
Title display  
Music recognition technology and related data  
are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the  
industry standard in music recognition technol-  
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-  
mation visit www.gracenote.com.  
(9)  
(8)  
(5)  
A title information will be displayed when the  
information is found in the Gracenote® Data-  
base on the built-in hard disk drive.  
(1) Recording mode indicator  
Shows the current recording mode. Fractions  
show number of recorded tracks total number of  
tracks in the CD.  
When multiple options of title information is  
find or no title information exists, [] is dis-  
played. A title may be displayed if you update  
the title information manually after recording  
has finished.  
Setting REC Mode Page 156  
(2) Record progress indicator  
Shows the progress of the recording. Fractions  
show number of recorded tracks total number of  
tracks in the CD.  
If no title information exists in the Gracenote®  
Database on the built-in hard disk drive, the  
date when the track was recorded is entered  
automatically. If you want to display the title  
information, enter the title manually after  
recording has finished.  
(3) Record indicator  
Shows the recording status.  
that recording is in progress.  
preparing recording.  
(Red) indicates  
(Blue) indicates  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Changing the title of the playlist or track ➞  
3 Touch [REC].  
Page 108  
The track being played is recorded.  
When recording finishes, the system returns  
to the normal playback screen of the CD in the  
end of the track.  
The title information displayed on the CD play-  
back screen and the recording screen is syn-  
chronized with the one edited in the music  
library. If you edit the title information in the  
music library, the title displayed on each  
screen will change accordingly.  
To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].  
Recording only the first track of  
a CD  
Title information can only be edited when one  
or more tracks in a disc is recorded in the  
music library.  
You can record only the first track of the CD. This  
mode is useful when you want to record only the  
first tracks from multiple CD singles (or EPs) con-  
secutively.  
“Editing the playlist” Page 120  
Recording all tracks in a CD  
1 [REC Mode] is set to [Single].  
Switching the recording mode Page 156  
The REC Mode cannot be changed during  
recording.  
When you play back a CD that is not recorded, it  
is automatically recorded in the music library  
(hard disk drive).  
All tracks are automatically recorded (Auto)  
2 Insert the CD you want to record.  
Recording automatically stars for the first  
track.  
in the default setting.  
Switching the recording mode (REC Mode)  
When recording finishes, the system returns  
to the normal playback screen of the CD in the  
end of the track.  
1 Insert the CD that you want to record.  
Recording automatically starts.  
To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].  
To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].  
When recording finishes, the system returns  
to the normal playback screen of the CD in the  
blank between current track and next track.  
If the CD is scratched or damaged, no data  
can be recorded on that part. In such a  
case, the track that falls on that part may  
be skipped.  
Stopping CD recording  
You can stop recording while recording a CD.  
(Recording can resume depending on the record-  
ing mode.)  
1 Touch [Stop].  
When REC Mode is [Auto] or [Single]:  
Recording is paused, and the system starts  
normal CD playback. To resume recording,  
touch [REC]. Recording also resumes in the  
following cases:  
Recording a CD manually  
You can record only your favorite tracks in the  
CD.  
— When you switch to another source, and  
then return to the CD source.  
1 [REC Mode] is set to [Manual].  
Switching the recording mode Page 156  
The REC Mode cannot be changed during  
recording.  
— When you turn off the ignition switch of the  
vehicle, and then restart the engine.  
When REC Mode is [Manual]:  
Recording is stopped. Touch [REC] to record  
the track being played.  
2 Play back the track you want to record.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
About writing data to the hard disk  
drive at low temperature  
Notes on CD recording  
Operations on the navigation system may take  
Writing to the hard disk drive such as recording  
music to the music library may be disabled when  
the navigation system detects abnormally low  
temperatures inside the vehicle. Functionality will  
become available once the temperature inside  
the vehicle returns to normal.  
more time during recording than normal.  
Tracks from a CD are recorded in 4 times  
speed. You can listen to that sound during  
recording.  
The data is recorded using a highly efficient  
compression method, so the sound may  
slightly differ from the original depending on  
the sound source. Noise may be heard in  
some cases, but this is not an malfunction.  
When recording please pay attention to  
these points;  
• Pioneer does not compensate for contents that  
cannot be recorded or any loss of recorded  
data due to a malfunction or failure of the navi-  
gation system.  
Recording is possible only with a CD that con-  
tains 44.1 kHz, 16-bit-stereo PCM digital audio  
data.  
• The data recorded on the navigation system  
cannot be used without permission from its  
right holder under copyright law except for per-  
sonal entertainment.  
Recording (or copying) to the music library is  
not possible from recording media (such as  
CD-Rs) in which a CD or other data is digitally  
stored. This is due to the Serial Copy Manage-  
ment System (SCMS) that was developed to  
prevent second-generation or serial copies.  
• Make sure to check the recording operation  
before recording and check the recorded con-  
tents after recording.  
• Recording is not guaranteed for all CDs.  
Recording to the music library is not possible  
from media (such as CD-Rs) in which MP3  
files are stored.  
About the data saved or recorded by the  
customer  
• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-  
tion system by the customer cannot be  
extracted from the navigation system, and  
those service cannot be accepted.  
• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-  
tion system by the customer cannot be guaran-  
teed during repair or service. Lost data that  
was saved or recorded by the customer is not  
guaranteed.  
When you are recording a CD with no track  
intervals (such as a live concert CD), if the  
engine stops and the power turns off, the  
sound may break in a track when the music  
data is played back.  
Notes for Hard disk drive  
• Due to copyrights, the music data recorded  
into the Music Library cannot be backed up  
during repair or service.  
Recording equipment and copyright  
Recording equipment should be used only for  
lawful copying and you are advised to check care-  
fully what is lawful copying in the country in  
which you are making a copy. Copying of copy-  
right material such as films or music is unlawful  
unless permitted by a legal exception or con-  
sented to by the right owners.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Title display  
Music Library Play  
Music recognition technology and related data  
are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the  
industry standard in music recognition technol-  
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-  
mation visit www.gracenote.com.  
You can play back or edit the tracks recorded in  
the hard disk drive in the source named music  
library (LIBRARY).  
Selecting [LIBRARY] as the  
source  
If no title information exists in the Gracenote®  
Database on the built-in hard disk drive, the  
date when the track was recorded is entered  
automatically. If you want to display the title  
information, enter the title manually after  
recording has finished.  
1 Touch the source icon and touch  
[LIBRARY].  
Page 99  
Page 122  
Screen configuration  
Relationship of groups, playlists, and  
tracks  
The music library is organized as follows with  
Music Library (LIBRARY)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3) (4)  
(5)  
(6)  
three levels:groups, playlists, and tracks.  
(7)  
There are four types of groups:  
Album group ([Albums]):  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
Stores the recorded track data in its original  
order. One playlist is automatically created when  
a CD is recorded.  
(2) Group name indicator  
Shows the group currently playing.  
Artist group ([Artists]):  
(3) Playlist name indicator  
Shows the playlist currently playing.  
Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted by art-  
ist names.  
(4) Track name indicator  
Shows the track currently playing.  
Genre group ([Genres]):  
Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted by  
genres.  
(5) Artist name indicator  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
My Favorite group ([My Favorites]):  
Stores the playlists registered in My Favorites.  
(6) Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
track.  
Maximum number you can register  
(7) Track list and playlist  
Shows the track list or the playlist currently play-  
Group  
Playlist  
Tracks for a playlist  
Albums  
Artists  
400  
400  
13  
99  
ing or temporary displayed.  
400  
400  
99  
Genres  
My Favorites  
5
If you try to record new one more than above, the  
oldest playlist will be deleted.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
(6) Displaying the details information screen  
Displays the information about the track or playl-  
Touch key operation  
ist displayed in blue on the track list. On the  
details information, you can delete the track or  
edit the track information.  
Listening to a track recorded in the  
Music Library  
1 Touch the source icon and then touch  
[LIBRARY].  
(7) Touch and hold: Register the track in My  
Mix.  
When the source icon is not displayed, you  
can display it by touching the screen.  
Touch keys  
Page 119  
(3)  
(5) (4)  
(8) Repeat play  
Each touch of  
changes the repeat range  
as follows:  
(3)  
(2)  
(7)  
Track Repeat — Repeat just the current track  
Playlist Repeat — Repeat just the current  
playlist  
(10)  
No display — Repeat the currently selected  
group  
(1)  
(6) (8) (9)  
Repeat play may stop if you perform an opera-  
tion that affects a track outside the repeating  
range during track repeat play.  
(1) Selecting a desired track from the list  
Touch a desired track to play.  
Touching or switches to the next or previ-  
If you perform random play or scan play dur-  
ing track repeat play, the repeating range  
changes to Playlist Repeat.  
ous page in the list.  
(2) Playback and Pause  
Touching switches between [playback] and  
(9) Playing tracks in random order  
The selected tracks in the repeated range are ran-  
[pause].  
(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-  
ward  
Touching skips to the start of the next track.  
domly played.  
Random play may stop if you perform an oper-  
ation that affects a track outside the repeating  
range or perform repeat play or scan play dur-  
ing track repeat play.  
Touching once skips to the start of the cur-  
rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-  
ous track.  
When the range of repeat play is Track  
Repeat, if you perform random play, the  
repeating range changes to Playlist Repeat.  
Touch and hold: fast backward or forward  
You can also perform these operations with  
using the TRK (/) button.  
Indicator  
Implication  
(4) Viewing upper contents  
Tracks of all playlists in the group  
are played in random order.  
Random play  
only  
Touching  
displays the contents of the  
upper playlist or group.  
Tracks in the selected playlist are  
played in random order.  
[Playlist  
Repeat] and  
Random play  
You cannot touch  
on the group selec-  
tion screen.  
“Relationship of groups, playlists, and tracks”  
(10) Scan play  
Scan play will be performed for the selected  
repeat range.  
(5) Displaying group selection screen  
You can search a track from categories.  
When the range of repeat play is Track  
Repeat, if you perform scan play, the repeat-  
ing range changes to Playlist Repeat.  
Search for a playlist Page 118  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When you find the desired track, touch  
Searching the playlist by artist  
Select the playlist formed according to artists,  
and play it back.  
to turn scan play off.  
After track or playlist scanning is finished,  
normal playback of the tracks will begin again.  
1 Touch [Search].  
The group selection screen appears.  
Indicator  
Implication  
The beginning of the first tracks of  
each playlist in the group is played  
for about 10 seconds.  
Scan only  
2 Touch [Artists].  
The Artist playlist appears.  
The beginning of each track in the  
selected playlist is played for  
about 10 seconds.  
[Playlist  
Repeat] and  
Scan play  
3 Touch the artist name (Artist playlist) you  
want to play back.  
Searching a track from the playlist  
Once tracks are recorded, the navigation system  
categorizes them in a [group], and several types  
of playlists are automatically created. A playlist is  
a list that shows the playback order of tracks.  
“Relationship of groups, playlists, and tracks”  
The first track in the selected playlist is played  
back.  
Searching for an album  
Select the playlist formed according to albums,  
and play it back.  
Search a playlist by Genre  
Select the playlist formed according to genres,  
and play it back.  
1 Touch [Search].  
1 Touch [Search].  
The group selection screen appears.  
The group selection screen appears.  
2 Touch [Albums].  
2 Touch [Genres].  
The genre playlist appears.  
3 Touch the genre (genre playlist) you want  
to play back.  
3 Touch the album name (Album playlist)  
you want to play back.  
The first track in the selected playlist is played  
back.  
The first track in the selected playlist is dis-  
played.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating a playlist with a cus-  
tomized order  
Register tracks one by one  
1 Play back the track you want to register.  
You can register your favorite tracks as a playlist,  
and play them back in desired order.  
The My Favorites group (My Favorites) has two  
types of playlists.  
2 Touch  
Favorites].  
, then touch [Add to My  
3 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to [My  
Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you  
want to register the track.  
My Mix playlist:  
You can register the track being played in one  
action.  
4 Touch [Yes].  
My Favorite 1-4 playlist:  
You can register tracks from the detailed screen  
The track is registered in the selected My  
Favorite playlist.  
information.  
Registering multiple tracks at a time  
Registering a track to the My Mix playl-  
ist  
You can register the track being played to the  
1 Play back the playlist that contains the  
tracks you want to register.  
favorite playlist called [My Mix].  
2 Touch  
ists.  
to display the list of playl-  
, then touch [Add to My  
1 Touch and hold [Memo] while playing  
back the track you want to register.  
The track being played is registered in the My  
Mix playlist.  
3 Touch  
Favorites].  
The item displayed in blue is the selected play-  
list.  
Registering tracks in the My Favorite 1-  
4 playlists  
You can register tracks in the favorite playlists  
4 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to [My  
Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you  
want to register the tracks.  
from [My Favorite 1] to [My Favorite 4].  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 Touch the tracks you want to register.  
When you touch a track, a check mark  
appears indicating that it is selected. To dese-  
lect it, touch the track again.  
Items that can be operated when edit-  
ing a playlist  
The items you can operate vary depending on the  
playlist being played as shown below:  
: Operation possible  
Touch to proceed to the next operation.  
• – : Operation not possible  
Operatable Item [Albums] [My Favor- See  
group  
ites] group  
*  
Edit Title  
Edit Pronounce  
Edit Artist  
Sort Playlist  
Delete Playlist  
Delete Track  
Update  
Add to My  
Favorite  
*  
• *: The [My Mix] group cannot be edited.  
Items that can be operated when edit-  
ing a track  
The items you can operate vary depending on the  
track being played as shown below:  
:Operation possible  
Select All:  
Selects all tracks in the playlist.  
All Off:  
Cancels selection of all tracks in the playlist.  
• – :Operation not possible  
6 Touch [Back].  
Operatable Item [Albums] [My Favor- See  
group  
ites] group  
7 Touch [Yes].  
Edit Title  
The tracks are registered in the selected My  
Favorite playlist.  
Edit Pronounce  
Edit Artist  
Edit Genre  
Sort Track List  
Delete Track  
Update  
Up to 99 tracks can be registered in one  
My Favorite playlist.  
Editing a playlist or tracks  
You can edit the tracks or playlist recorded in the  
Music library.  
Add to My  
Favorite  
Only the playlists and tracks in the [Albums]  
group and the [My Favorites] group can be  
edited. [Pronounce] in the artist playlist can be  
edited.  
Switching to the edit mode  
1 Touch the playlist in the [Albums] or [My  
Favorites].  
2 Touch the track you want to edit.  
The item displayed in blue is the track cur-  
rently playing.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Touch  
.
Operating the playlist edit mode  
The system enters the track edit mode.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
Album playlist:  
Page 122  
All editing operations are possible. The edited  
contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard  
disk drive.  
4 Touch [Back] to return the previous  
screen.  
My Mix playlist:  
Only (4), (6), and (8) can be performed.  
5 Touch  
level.  
to return to the previous  
My Favorite playlist:  
Only (1), (2), (4), (6), and (8) can be performed.  
(1) Entering a desired playlist title  
Editing the playlist title or track title ➞  
Page 122  
(2) Editing the pronunciation that is used as  
a voice command for voice recognition  
Editing the pronounce Page 123  
(3) Entering a desired artist name  
Editing the artist title Page 123  
(4) Sorting playback order of the playlists  
Changing playback order of the playlist or  
The item displayed in blue is the selected play-  
list.  
(5) Deleting the playlist from the hard disk  
drive  
(6) Deleting the selected tracks from that  
playlist  
6 Touch  
.
The system enters the playlist edit mode.  
Delete some tracks at once Page 124  
(7) Updating Album title information  
Updating the album title and track title ➞  
Page 125  
(8) Adding the selected tracks to My Favorite  
Registering the track to My Favorite ➞  
To return to the previous screen, touch  
Page 119  
[Back].  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating the track edit mode  
Changing the title of the playlist or  
track  
You can change titles of playlists or tracks. The  
Album playlist:  
All items can be edited except for (5). The edited  
titles changed here are displayed on the screen.  
contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard  
disk drive.  
1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit  
mode.  
(1)  
(2)  
Displaying detailed information screen ➞  
Page 117  
(3)  
(4)  
2 Touch [Title].  
3 Touch [Yes].  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
The content to be changed in Step 4 can be  
reflected to “voice command”.  
No:  
My Mix playlist, My Favorite playlist:  
Proceeds to the next step without registering  
it as a voice command.  
Only (5), (6), (8) can be performed.  
4 Enter a new character string, and then  
touch [OK].  
(5)  
(6)  
(8)  
(1) Entering a desired track title  
Editing the playlist title or track title ➞  
Page 122  
(2) Editing the pronunciation that is used as  
a voice command for voice recognition  
Editing the pronounce Page 123  
(3) Entering a desired artist name  
Editing the artist title Page 123  
(4) Changing genre  
The system pronounces the character string  
once, and the pronunciation confirmation  
message appears. Touch [Yes] to fix the  
change.  
Changing the genre for the track Page 125  
(5) Changing the order to play back tracks  
Changing playback order of the track ➞  
No:  
Page 123  
Returns to the detailed information screen.  
Repeat:  
(6) Deleting this track  
You can listen to the pronunciation again.  
(7) Updating track title information  
Updating the album title and track title ➞  
5 Touch [Yes].  
Page 125  
The changed character string is fixed and the  
system returns to the previous screen.  
(8) Adding the track to My Favorite  
Registering the track to My Favorite ➞  
Page 119  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 Select an artist name from the list.  
The artist name is changed to the one you  
selected. In the playlist edit mode, touching  
[Yes] changes the artist name to the one you  
selected.  
Changing the pronunciation of a playl-  
ist name or track name  
You can change the pronunciation of playlist or  
track name. The pronunciation is used as a com-  
mand for voice recognition.  
Only [Pronounce] can be edited for an artist  
Sorting the playlists  
The playback order of playlists in the group can  
playlist.  
The navigation system recognizes only the  
voice recognition character registered in the  
current language. If you change the interface  
language, the voice recognition character reg-  
istered before you change the language will  
not be recognized.  
be changed.  
If there is only one playlist, the playback order  
cannot be changed.  
1 Enter the playlist edit mode.  
Displaying detailed information screen ➞  
Page 117  
1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit  
mode.  
2 Touch [Sort Playlists].  
Displaying detailed information screen ➞  
3 Touch the playlist that you want to  
change the order for.  
Page 117  
2 Touch [Pronounce].  
3 Enter a new character string, and then  
touch [OK].  
The system pronounces the character once,  
and the pronunciation confirmation message  
appears. Touch [Yes] to fix the change.  
No:  
Returns to the detailed information screen.  
Repeat:  
4 Touch  
,
,
, or  
to determine the  
position you want to put.  
You can listen to the pronunciation again.  
4 Touch [Yes].  
The changed character is fixed and the sys-  
tem returns to the previous screen.  
Renaming an artist name in the playlist  
or track  
You can rename the artist name in the playlist or  
track.  
1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit  
mode.  
Displaying detailed information screen ➞  
Page 117  
2 Touch [Artist].  
:
3 Touch [Select from history List].  
Moves playlists by page.  
:
[Keyboard Input]:  
Moves playlists one by one.  
The character input screen appears, and you  
can change the artist name with the keyboard.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 Touch the selected playlist again.  
Deleting a playlist  
You can delete a playlist in the Album group. (You  
The position of that playlist is fixed.  
cannot delete playlists in other groups.)  
6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the  
If you delete a playlist in an album group, all  
tracks in the playlist are deleted from the hard  
disk drive. (They are deleted from the My  
Favorites group at the same time.)  
playback order of other playlists.  
7 Touch [ESC].  
The new order is fixed, and the system returns  
to the normal playback screen.  
1 Enter the playlist edit mode.  
Displaying detailed information screen ➞  
Page 117  
Sorting the tracks in the My Mix (My  
Favorites) playlist  
The playback order of tracks in the My Mix playlist  
2 Touch [Delete This Playlists].  
and the My favorites playlist can be changed.  
3 Touch [Yes].  
The playlist is deleted.  
1 Enter the track edit mode.  
Displaying detailed information screen ➞  
Page 117  
Deleting a track from the playlist  
You can delete tracks from the playlist.  
2 Touch [Sort Tracklists].  
If you delete a track in an album group, the  
track is deleted from the hard disk drive. (It is  
deleted from the My Favorites group at the  
same time.)  
3 Touch the track that you want to change.  
4 Touch  
,
,
, or  
to determine the  
destination.  
If you delete the tracks in the My Mix playlist  
or the My Favorite playlist, they are only  
deleted from the playlist, and not from the  
hard disk drive.  
5 Touch the selected track again.  
The destination is fixed.  
6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the  
playback order of other tracks.  
1 Enter the playlist edit mode.  
Displaying detailed information screen ➞  
Page 117  
7 Touch [ESC].  
The new order is fixed, and the system returns  
to the normal playback screen.  
2 Touch [Delete Tracks].  
3 Touch the tracks you want to delete.  
When you touch a track, a check mark  
appears indicating that it is selected. To dese-  
lect it, touch the track again.  
Touch to proceed to the next operation.  
Select All:  
Selects all tracks in the playlist.  
All Off:  
Cancels the selection of all tracks in the playl-  
ist.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 Touch [Back].  
Retrieving track title information  
5 Touch [Yes].  
1 Select the playlist in [Album] group, and  
enter the track edit mode.  
Changing the genre of a track  
Displaying detailed information screen ➞  
Page 117  
1 Enter the track edit mode.  
Displaying detailed information screen ➞  
Page 117  
2 Touch [Update Title].  
Information search begins. When the title  
information is obtaineded, the candidates  
screen appears.  
2 Select a genre from the list.  
3 Select the corresponding track title from  
the list.  
The title information is updated to the one you  
selected.  
The disc updates the Gracenote® Data-  
base for the Gracenote Music recognition  
service on your navigation system will be  
available in the future.  
The genre is changed, and the system returns  
to the previous screen.  
Assigning another candidate for  
title information  
If the current title information is not desired title,  
you can search for another title information from  
Gracenote® Database in the hard disk drive man-  
ually and assign another candidate.  
If there were multiple options of title information,  
you can select one title from them.  
Music recognition technology and related  
data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote  
is the industry standard in music recognition  
technology and related content delivery. For  
more information visit www.gracenote.com.  
Retrieving album title information  
1 Select the playlist in [Album] group, and  
enter the playlist edit mode.  
Displaying detailed information screen ➞  
Page 117  
2 Touch [Update Title].  
Information search begins. When the title  
information is obtaineded, the candidates  
screen appears.  
3 Select the desired album title from the  
list.  
The title information is updated to the one you  
selected.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13  
Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)  
GEX-P910XM, GEX-P900XM  
Operating to XM Satellite Radio  
(1) (2)  
(9)(3)  
(5)  
You can use the navigation system to control a  
XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold sepa-  
rately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the XM  
tuner’s operation manuals. This section provides  
information on XM operations with the navigation  
system which differs from that described in the  
XM tuner’s operation manual.  
(7)  
(8)  
About the logo for channel name  
Only the logo data that is contained in the naviga-  
Selecting [XM] as the source  
tion system can be displayed for each channel.  
The logo of a newly established channel that is  
not contained cannot be displayed. When no logo  
can be displayed, the following substitute icon is  
displayed.  
1 Touch the source icon and touch [XM].  
For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞  
Page 99  
Screen configuration  
GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM  
All Ch Mode  
Substitute icon  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
(1) (2) (3)(4)  
(6)  
(5)  
(2) XM band indicator  
Shows the XM band which has been selected.  
(7)  
(8)  
(3) XM channel number indicator  
Shows XM channel number the tuner is currently  
tuned.  
(4) XM station name indicator  
Shows XM broadcast station name the tuner is  
Category Mode  
currently tuned.  
(9)  
(5) XM channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all chan-  
nels in All Ch Mode, and select a channel from  
selected category in Category Mode.  
Switching the XM channel select mode ➞  
Page 128  
(6) XM channel category  
Shows the category of broadcast channel.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
(7) XM station name logo  
Touch keys (GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM)  
The message “-ON THE AIR-“ disappears  
if the navigation system cannot receive XM  
tuner reception for some reason.  
If you use GEX-P910XM,the logo for chan-  
nel name is not available.  
(8) Detail information  
Shows the detail information of the broadcast  
(12)  
channel currently being received.  
(9) Category icon  
Shows the category icon for the selected chan-  
Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be  
used on GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM.  
nel.  
(1) Touch: Recalling channels from the pre-  
set  
Touch to recall the preset channel.  
Touch key operation  
1 Touch the source icon and then touch  
[XM] to select the XM.  
In All Ch Mode, you can also recall the preset  
channel by pressing the P.LIST (/) but-  
ton.  
When the source icon is not displayed, you  
can display it by touching the screen.  
In Category Mode, the screen shows cate-  
gory search.  
Touch keys (GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM)  
Page 1 (All Ch Mode)  
Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations  
You can register the channel currently being  
broadcast to the preset list.  
Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM  
(1)  
bands can be stored in memory.  
(2)  
(5)  
(4)  
If you use GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM, the  
channel number does not appear on the  
touch key.  
(3)  
(6)  
(2) Perform manual tuning  
The channels move up or down step by step.  
Page 1 (Category Mode)  
If you keep touching  
or  
you  
can skip broadcasting channels.  
(11)  
You can also perform these operations by  
(2)  
(5)  
(4)  
using the TRK (/) button.  
(3) Switching to the list display*  
You can select a desired channel from the list dis-  
(3)  
(6)  
play.  
Selecting a channel from the XM channel list  
Page 2  
(4) Switching the XM channel select mode  
You can switch the mode between the two meth-  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
ods for selecting and listing the channel.  
(10)  
All Ch Mode :  
You can select a channel from all channels when  
you operate.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Category Mode :  
You can select a channel within selected cate-  
GEX-P910XM:  
Channel name — Artist name/feature — Song/  
gory when you operate.  
program title — Channel category  
This function is not available with GEX-  
(5) Select a XM band  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired XM  
P10XMT and GEX-P920XM.  
band is displayed, XM 1, XM 2 or XM 3. This is  
useful for switching the preset.  
Display the Radio ID  
(6) Switching the touch keys to next page  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is displayed.  
(7) Memorizing the current song*  
The song title and artist name being broadcast  
1 Touch [10Key Direct].  
will be memorized in My Mix. When the song that  
matches the song information memorized in My  
Mix is broadcast, you can tune the channel to the  
one that is broadcasting that song.  
2 Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
You can also display the Radio ID to select  
[RADIO ID] from channel category in the  
Category Mode.  
“Using the My Mix function” Page 130  
(8) Setting the notification of the memorized  
tracks*  
You can set the song information memorized in  
Selecting a channel from the XM  
channel list display  
My Mix. You can also delete the memorized song.  
Setting the notification of the memorized  
The list content can be switched so you can  
search for the track you want to listen to not only  
by the channel name but also by the artist name  
or song title.  
Deleting the memorized tracks Page 130  
(9) Selecting a XM channel directly  
You can select a XM channel directly by entering  
The channel list shows all channels during  
the All Ch Mode, and the channels included  
in the selected category during the Category  
Mode. To switch the channel mode, touch  
[Mode].  
the desired channel number.  
Enter the channel number, touch [Enter], and  
then touch [Back].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
This function in not available with GEX-  
1 Touch [List].  
P900XM.  
XM channel list appears in the display.  
Each touch of the [List] changes the settings  
as follows:  
(10) Switching the touch keys to previous  
page  
Detail information display — Ch Name List  
(Channel name) — Song Title List (Song title)  
— Artist Name List (Artist name)  
(11) Switching the channel category  
Touch [Up] or [Down] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
2 Touch the desired channel that you want  
to listen to.  
(12) Switching the XM information  
Each touch of [Disp] changes the display on the  
bottom of the detail information as follows:  
Touch  
or to switch to the next page or  
previous page.  
GEX-P900XM:  
Channel name — Artist name/feature — Song/  
During the Category Mode, touch [Up] or  
[Down] to switch to another category.  
program title — Information — Channel number  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the alert for each memorized  
song  
You can change the setting of the alert when the  
track is broadcast again. You can enable or dis-  
able alert for each song.  
Using the My Mix function  
The My Mix function memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being  
received. When the song that matches the mem-  
orized song title and artist name is being broad-  
cast on a station other than the one you are  
listening to, you will be alerted, and you can  
switch the station to listen to that song.  
1 Touch [Memo Edit].  
You will receive alert for all items with a check  
mark.  
A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the  
2 Touch the song title that you want to  
exclude from the alert target.  
song title and the artist name are memorized.  
The check mark is removed, and the song title  
is excluded from the alert target.  
If you touch that again, the check mark is  
put and the song title is included in the  
alert target.  
Memorizing the song title and the artist  
name of a song  
The song title and artist name of the song you are  
listening to can be memorized.  
1 Touch and hold [Memo] for two seconds  
or more.  
Switching the alert setting  
You can enable or disable the alert for all items  
with a check mark. This function will be useful  
when you want to turn the alert off temporarily  
without changing the condition of check mark.  
The song title and artist name of current song  
you are listening to are memorized, and a con-  
firmation message appears.  
The song title and artist name of up to 15  
songs can be memorized. Trying to save  
more than 15 songs will overwrite old ones.  
The song title or the artist name cannot be  
memorized when [--------] is displayed on  
the title information.  
1 Touch [Memo Edit].  
2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
If the alert setting is [Alert Off],  
is  
displayed on the information plate.  
This function invalid for the channel 000.  
There is a possibility the memorized title is  
not displayed correctly.  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
Alert message is displayed. Touch [Yes] to switch  
to that station, and you can listen to that track.  
If the memorized song is not selected in the  
My Mix list, no notification will be provided  
even when that song is broadcast.  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized tracks  
from the song title list.  
Alert may not be provided depending on the  
situation of the navigation system.  
1 Touch [Memo Edit].  
Setting the notification of the memorized  
2 Touch and hold the track you want to  
delete.  
If there is slight difference between the mem-  
orized title and the title of the song being  
broadcast, no notification will be provided  
though they are the same song.  
That track will be deleted from the alert target.  
To delete all songs that are memorized,  
touch [Delete All].  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 A message will appear asking you to con-  
Operating to the SIRIUS Satel-  
lite Radio  
firm the deletion. Touch [OK].  
You can use navigation system to control a SIR-  
IUS satellite digital tuner, which is sold sepa-  
rately. For details concerning operation, refer to  
the SIRIUS tuner’s operation manuals. This sec-  
tion provides information on SIRIUS operations  
with navigation system which differs from that  
described in the SIRIUS tuner’s operation man-  
ual.  
Using the direct traffic  
announcement function  
You can listen to the memorized <Instant Traffic  
& Weather> channel by directly calling it up with  
the T button on the navigation unit. (Only one  
station can be memorized.)  
Memorize a <Instant Traffic &  
Weather> channel  
The following functions are not available in  
SIR-PNR1.  
1 Tune into <Instant Traffic & Weather>  
channel.  
— Selecting team for game alert  
— Displaying game information  
— Using the song alert function  
— Using the direct traffic announcement  
function  
2 Press and hold the T button for two sec-  
onds or more.  
That <Instant Traffic & Weather> channel will  
be memorized.  
The channel 000 and 001 can not be mem-  
orized newly (although the channel 001 is  
the default).  
Selecting [SIRIUS] as the  
source  
1 Touch the source icon and touch [SIR-  
IUS].  
Even if you use the SIRIUS satellite radio  
tuner together, only one station can be  
memorized. The station memorized after-  
ward will overwrite the existing one.  
Page 99  
Screen configuration  
Calling up the memorized <Instant  
Traffic & Weather> channel  
(1) (2)  
(4) (3)  
1 Press the T button.  
You can call up a <Instant Traffic &  
Weather> channel even from a source  
other than the XM source.  
To cancel the announcement, touch  
[TRFC Off] on the screen or press the T  
button again.  
(5)  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
(2) SIRIUS band indicator  
Shows the SIRIUS band which has been  
selected.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
(3) SIRIUS channel select mode indicator  
Page 1 (Category Mode)  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all chan-  
nels in All Ch Mode, and select a channel from  
selected category in Category Mode.  
(13)  
Switching the SIRIUS channel select mode ➞  
Page 132  
(4) SIRIUS channel number indicator  
Shows SIRIUS channel number the tuner is  
tuned to.  
Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be  
used on SIR-PNR1.  
(5) Detail information  
Shows the detail information of the broadcast  
(1) Touch: Recalling channels from the pre-  
set  
channel currently being received.  
Touch to recall the preset channel.  
The message “-ON THE AIR-” disappears if  
the navigation system cannot receive SIRIUS  
tuner reception for some reason.  
In All Ch Mode, you can recall the preset  
channel by pressing the P.LIST (/) but-  
ton.  
In Category Mode, the screen displays cate-  
Touch key operation  
gory search.  
1 Touch the source icon and then touch  
[SIRIUS] to select the SIRIUS.  
Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations  
You can register the channel currently being  
broadcast to the preset list.  
When the source icon is not displayed, you  
can display it by touching the screen.  
Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIRIUS  
bands can be stored in memory.  
Touch keys  
(2) Perform manual tuning  
The channels move up or down step by step.  
Page 1 (All Ch Mode)  
If you keep touching  
or  
you  
can skip broadcasting channels.  
(1)  
You can also perform these operations by  
(2)  
(5)  
(4)  
using the TRK (/) button.  
(3) Switching the SIRIUS display  
Each touch [DISP] of changes the display infor-  
(3) (6)  
mation.  
Channel number — Channel name — Channel  
category — Artist name/feature — Song/program  
title — Composer  
Page 2 (All Ch Mode)  
(7)  
(8)  
Touch and hold to switch ON/OFF the infor-  
mation scroll.  
(10)  
(12)  
(4) Switching the SIRIUS channel select  
mode  
You can switch the mode between the two meth-  
(9)(11)  
ods for selecting and listing the channel.  
All Ch Mode:  
You can select a channel from all channels when  
you operate.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Category Mode:  
You can select a channel within selected cate-  
Selecting team for Game Alert  
This navigation system can alert you when games  
involving your favorite teams are about to start. To  
use this function you need in advance to set the  
game alert to the teams.  
gory when you operate.  
(5) Select a SIRIUS band  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired SIRIUS  
band is displayed, SIRIUS 1, SIRIUS 2, or SIR-  
IUS 3. This is useful for switching the preset.  
1 Touch [Game Alert].  
The League/Team Setting screen appears.  
(6) Switching the touch keys to next page  
(7) Selecting team for game alert*  
You can register your favorite team.  
2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select the  
league.  
Selecting team for game alert Page 133  
(8) Displaying game information*  
You can display game information and changes  
to the broadcast channel.  
Displaying game information Page 134  
(9) Register the song as My Mix*  
The song information currently broadcast will be  
3 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select the  
team.  
memorized. When the song that matches the  
memorized song information, you can tune the  
channel to the one that is broadcasting that  
song.  
4 Touch [On/Off].  
The team displayed as [On] is the alert target.  
Using the song alert function Page 134  
(10) Setting the notification of the memo-  
rized tracks*  
You can set the memorized song information. You  
can also delete the memorized song.  
Setting the notification of the memorized  
5 Touch [Alert On].  
When the selected team is excluded from  
the alert target, the team is displayed as  
[Off]. Up to 12 teams can be selected  
when you have already made 12 team  
selections, Full is displayed and additional  
team selection is not possible. In this case,  
first delete the team selection and then try  
again.  
Deleting the memorized songs Page 135  
(11) Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly  
The Channel number input screen appears. You  
can select a SIRIUS channel directly by entering  
the desired channel number.  
While the input number is displayed, touch  
[Enter], and then touch [Back].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
Switching the Game Alert on or off  
You can enable or disable the alert for selected  
items. This function will be useful when to turn  
the alert off temporarily without changing the set-  
ting of each selected team.  
(12) Switching the touch keys to previous  
page  
(13) Switching the channel category  
Touch [Up] or [Down] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
1 Touch [Game Alert].  
The League/Team Setting screen appears.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
Memorizing the song title and the artist  
name of a song  
The song title and artist name of current song you  
When the game involving team is  
broadcast  
are listening to can be memorized.  
A message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to switch  
to that station, and you can view to that game  
information. If you touch [Stay], the channel  
does not switch.  
1 Touch and hold [Memo].  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to are memorized, and [Song  
Saved] is displayed.  
Alert may not be provided depending on the  
The song title and artist name of up to 10  
tracks can be memorized. If you try to save  
more than 10 tracks [FULL] is displayed.  
You cannot memorize the song without the  
song title information or the artist name  
information.  
situation of the navigation system.  
Displaying game information  
(Game Info)  
You can display the game information of the team  
to which you have set an alert, and change to the  
broadcast channel.  
There is a possibility the memorized title is  
not displayed correctly.  
This function is unavailable if no team is  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
Alert message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to  
switch to that station, and you can listen to that  
track. If you touch [Stay], the cannel does not  
switch.  
selected in the game alert function.  
1 Touch [Game Info].  
The game name and the broadcast channel  
are also displayed.  
If the memorized song is not selected in the  
song alert list, no notification will be provided  
even when that track is broadcast.  
2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to view the  
game score information which is regis-  
tered.  
Notification may not be provided depending  
The game score will be updated automati-  
cally.  
on the situation of the navigation system.  
Setting the notification of the memorized  
Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel  
that broadcasts the displayed game.  
If you have not made any team selections,  
Not Set is displayed.  
If there is slight difference between the mem-  
orized title and the title of the track being  
broadcast, no notification will be provided  
though they are the same song.  
When games involving your favorite teams  
are not currently playing, No Game is dis-  
played.  
Setting the alert for each memorized  
song  
You can change the setting of the alert when the  
track is broadcast again. You can enable or dis-  
able alert for each song.  
Using the My Mix function  
The My Mix function memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being  
received. When the track that matches the mem-  
orized song title and artist name is being broad-  
cast on a station other than the one you are  
listening to, you will be alerted, and you can  
switch the station to listen to that song.  
1 Touch [Memo Edit].  
You will receive alert for all items with a check  
mark.  
A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the  
song title and the artist name are memorized.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 Touch [Previous] and [Next] to select the  
song title that you want to exclude from  
the alert target.  
Even if you use the XM satellite radio tuner  
together, only one station can be memo-  
rized. The station memorized afterward will  
overwrite the existing one.  
3 Touch [On/Off].  
The song title displayed as [On] is the alert  
target. When the song title is excluded from  
the alert target, the song title is displayed as  
[Off].  
Calling up the memorized Traffic &  
Weather channel  
1 Press the T button.  
You can call up a Traffic & Weather channel  
even from a source other than the SIRIUS  
source.  
4 Touch [Alert On].  
Switching the alert on or off  
You can enable or disable the alert for selected  
items.  
To cancel the announcement, touch [TRFC  
Off] on the screen or press the T button  
again.  
This function will be useful when you want to turn  
the alert off temporarily without changing the  
condition of each memorized song.  
1 Touch [Memo Edit].  
2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized tracks  
from the song title list.  
1 Touch [Memo Edit]  
2 Touch [Delete This Song] when the track  
you want to delete is displayed.  
That track will be deleted from the alert target.  
3 A message will appear asking you to con-  
firm the deletion. Touch [Yes].  
Using the Traffic & Weather pre-  
set function  
You can listen to the memorized Traffic &  
Weather channel by directly calling it up with the  
T button on the navigation system. (Only one sta-  
tion can be memorized.)  
Memorize a Traffic & Weather channel  
1 Tune into the Traffic & Weather channel.  
2 Press and hold the T button for two sec-  
onds or more.  
That Traffic & Weather channel will be memo-  
rized.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 14  
Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)  
When Pioneer audio equipment is connected to  
the navigation system using IP-BUS or AV-BUS,  
such equipment can be operated from the navi-  
gation system. This chapter describes the opera-  
tion of the audio source that can be used when  
the Pioneer audio equipment is connected. When  
reading this chapter, please also refer to the oper-  
ation manual of the AV equipment connected to  
the navigation system.  
Shows which repeat range has been selected.  
(5) Track number indicator  
Shows the track currently playing.  
(6) Track title indicator*  
Shows the track title currently playing.  
(7) Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
track.  
(8) Disc number display  
Shows the disc number in multi-CD player.  
Operating the Multi-CD Player  
The titles of the items marked with an asterisk  
(*) will be displayed only when the CD TEXT  
disc is used. When using a normal music CD,  
they are displayed as [].  
You can use the navigation system to control a  
multi-CD player, which is sold separately.  
Only those functions described in this manual  
are available for multi-CD player. (Depending  
on the multi-CD player, the function may be  
invalid.)  
Touch key operation  
1 Touch the source icon and then touch [M-  
CD] to select the multi-CD player.  
Selecting [M-CD] as the source  
When the source icon is not displayed, you  
can display it by touching the screen.  
1 Touch the source icon and touch [M-CD].  
Touch keys  
Page 99  
(3) (4)  
(5)  
Screen configuration  
(1)  
(5)  
(2)(3) (6)  
(4)  
(3)  
(2)  
(8)  
(7)  
(1)  
(6)  
(7)  
When the multi-CD player has performed the  
preparatory operations, Ready is displayed.  
(8)  
If the multi-CD player does not operate prop-  
erly, an error message such as Error-XX may  
be displayed. Refer to the multi-CD player  
owner’s manual.  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
(2) Disc number indicator  
Shows the disc currently playing.  
If there are no discs in the multi-CD player  
magazine, No Disc is displayed.  
(3) Disc title indicator*  
Shows the disc title currently playing.  
(4) Repeat range indicator  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
(1) Changing the disc in the magazine  
(8) Scanning play  
The first 10 seconds of each track of the current  
(2) Playback and Pause  
Touching switches between [playback] and  
disc (or the first track of each disc) is played.  
[pause].  
Indicator  
Implication  
The beginning of the first tracks of  
each disc is played for about 10  
seconds.  
[Scan] only  
(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-  
ward  
Touching skips to the start of the next track.  
The beginning of each track in the  
selected disc is played for about  
10 seconds.  
[Disc Repeat]  
and [Scan]  
Touching once skips to the start of the cur-  
rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-  
ous track.  
When you find the desired track (or disc)  
touch to turn scan play off.  
Touch and hold: fast backward or forward  
Keep touching or to perform fast back-  
After track or disc scanning is finished, nor-  
ward or forward.  
mal playback of the tracks will begin again.  
You can also perform these operations by  
using the TRK (/) button.  
(4) Playing back the previous disc  
The disc previous to the currently played disc will  
be played.  
(5) Playing back the next disc  
The disc next to the currently played disc will be  
played.  
(6) Repeating play  
Each touch of  
changes the settings as fol-  
lows:  
Track Repeat — Repeat just the current track  
Disc Repeat — Repeat the current disc  
If you select other discs during repeat play,  
the repeat play range setting will be canceled.  
If you perform track search or fast forward/  
rewind during Track Repeat, the repeat play  
range changes to Disc Repeat.  
(7) Playing tracks in random order  
Tracks will play in a random order within the pre-  
viously selected repeat ranges.  
Indicator  
Implication  
Tracks of all disc in the magazine  
are played in random order.  
[Random]  
only  
Tracks in the selected disc are  
played in random order.  
[Disc Repeat]  
and [Random]  
If you perform random play during [Track  
Repeat], the repeat play range changes to  
[Disc Repeat].  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
song.  
Operating the iPod®  
You can control an iPod by combining the Pio-  
neer iPod adapter (sold separately) to the naviga-  
tion system. For details concerning operation,  
refer to the owner’s manual of iPod adopter. This  
section provides information on iPod operations  
with the navigation system that differ from those  
described in the owner’s manual of iPod adopter.  
(8) Song title indicator  
Shows the title of the current song.  
(9) Playing Song Information  
Shows the information and status of the current  
song.  
(10) Song title, Artist name, and Album title  
indicator  
When playing a song, Song title, Artist name, and  
When you use the iPod (sold separately) with  
this Navigation System, Pioneer iPod adapter  
is required.  
Album title are displayed.  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Touch key operation  
1 Touch the source icon and then touch  
[iPod] to select the iPod.  
Selecting [iPod] as the source  
When the source icon is not displayed, you  
can display it by touching the screen.  
1 Touch the source icon and touch [iPod].  
Page 99  
Touch keys  
(2)  
(4)  
(3)  
Screen configuration  
(1)  
(2)  
(4)  
(5)  
(8)  
(3)  
(2)  
(1)  
(6)  
(7)  
(5)  
(6)  
(1) Playback and Pause  
Touching switches between [playback] and  
(10)  
(9)  
[pause].  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
(2) Touch: Skip back or forward to another  
song  
Touching skips to the start of the next song.  
(2) Song number indicator  
Shows the number of song playing in the  
Touching once skips to the start of the cur-  
rent song. Touching again will skip to the previ-  
ous song.  
selected list.  
(3) Repeat play indicator  
Shows whether Repeat is selected for the current  
Touch and hold: fast forward or rewind  
song or all song on current list.  
You can also perform these operation with  
(4) Shuffle play indicator  
Shows whether Shuffle play is selected for songs  
pressing the TRK (/) button.  
(3) Displaying the previous screen  
Touch on the refine search or other screen to  
of albums.  
(5) Album title indicator  
Shows the album title of the song.  
return to the previous screen.  
(6) Artist name indicator  
Shows the artist name of the current song.  
(7) Play time indicator  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
(4) Narrowing down the tracks to play back  
You can narrow down the choices of songs to  
If you select [Songs], proceed to step 4.  
When you select Artists, Albums or  
Genres you can start a playback of all  
songs in the selected list. To do this, keep  
touching the list title.  
play from five categories.  
“Browsing for a song” Page 140  
(5) Repeating play  
Touch  
repeatedly until the desired repeat  
3 Touch a list title that you want to play.  
Repeat this operation until you find the  
desired song.  
range appears in the display.  
Repeat One — Repeat just the current song  
Repeat All — Repeat all songs in the selected  
list  
To return to the previous screen touch  
.
(6) Shuffle play  
This function shuffles songs or albums and plays  
4 From the song list, touch the song you  
want to play.  
them in random order.  
Each touch of  
lows:  
changes the settings as fol-  
To go to the next page of the list, touch  
To return to the previous page of the list,  
.
Shuffle Songs — Play back songs in random  
order within the selected list  
touch  
.
Shuffle Albums — Selected an album ran-  
domly, and then play back all songs in that  
album in order  
Browsing for a song  
The operations for controlling an iPod with this  
navigation system are designed to be close to  
iPod operation. This allows you to search and  
play songs as you would with an iPod.  
1 Touch [Search].  
If you do nothing about 30 seconds after the  
Step 1 to the Step 4 is done, actual screen  
returns to the previous screen.  
2 Touch one of the categories in which you  
want to search for a song.  
Playlists (playlists)  
Artists (artists)  
Albums (albums)  
Songs (songs)  
Genres (genres)  
The search screen is displayed.  
The  
icon on the left indicates that the item  
is a [Playlist], and the  
the item is a [Song].  
icon indicates that  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(5) Preset list display  
Shows the preset list.  
Operating the TV tuner  
Touch key operation  
• For safety reasons, visual images cannot  
be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.  
To view visual images, you must stop in a  
safe place and put on the parking brake  
before setting your route (see page 18  
Interlock for details).  
1 Touch the source icon and then touch  
[TV] to select the TV tuner.  
When the source icon is not displayed, you  
can display it by touching the screen.  
Touch keys  
You can use the navigation system to control a TV  
tuner, which is sold separately. For details con-  
cerning operation, refer to the TV tuner’s opera-  
tion manual. This section provides information on  
TV operations with the navigation system that dif-  
fer from those described in the TV tuner’s opera-  
tion manual. When you attempt to watch visual  
images while driving, the warning Viewing of  
front seat video source while driving is  
(2)  
(1)  
(4)  
(3)  
(1) Selecting channels from the list  
The list lets you see the list of channels and  
strictly prohibited. will appear on the screen.  
select one of them to view.  
Selecting [TV] as the source  
Touching or switches to the next or previ-  
ous page in the list.  
1 Touch the source icon and touch [TV].  
Page 99  
You can register your favorite channels in the  
list.  
“Storing and recalling broadcast stations” ➞  
Page 142  
Screen configuration  
(2) Touch: Perform manual tuning  
The channels move up or down step by step.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning  
The tuner will scan the channels until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is found.  
If you keep touching  
or  
you  
can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning  
starts as soon as you release the keys.  
(5)  
You can also perform these operation by using  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
the TRK (/) button.  
(3) Storing the strongest broadcast stations  
sequentially  
Twelve channels with strong reception sensitivity  
(2) Band indicator  
Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to.  
(3) Preset number indicator  
Shows which preset has been selected.  
can be registered automatically in the preset list.  
“Storing the strongest broadcast stations  
(4) Channel indicator  
Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned.  
sequentially” Page 142  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
(4) Change band  
Touching [Band] switches between [TV 1] and  
[TV 2].  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1 —  
P12, you can easily store up to 12 broadcast sta-  
tions for later recall with a touch of the key.  
1 When you find a station that you want to  
store in memory keep touching a preset  
tuning key P1 P12.  
The selected station has been stored in mem-  
ory. The next time you touch the same preset  
tuning key P1 P12 the station is recalled  
from memory. To switch between P1 P6  
and P7 P12, touch or . When the  
touch panel keys are not displayed, you can  
display them by touching the screen.  
Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV  
bands can be stored in memory.  
You can also press the P.LIST (/) but-  
ton to recall stations assigned to preset  
tuning keys P1 P12.  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
stations sequentially  
1 Touch and hold [BSSM].  
BSSM starts. The 12 strongest broadcast sta-  
tions will be stored under preset tuning keys  
P1 P12 in order from the lowest channel  
up.  
To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Cancel].  
Storing broadcast stations with BSSM  
may replace current broadcast stations  
stored in preset memory.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 15  
Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)  
Operating the AV Input source  
(AV)  
Selecting [EXT 1] or [EXT 2] as  
the source  
1 Touch the source icon and touch [EXT 1]  
or [EXT 2].  
• For safety reasons, visual images cannot  
be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.  
To view visual images, you must stop in a  
safe place and put on the parking brake  
before setting your route (see page 18  
Interlock for details).  
Page 99  
Screen configuration  
(1)  
(2)  
Selecting [AV INPUT] as the  
source  
1 [AV Input] is set to [Video].  
Selecting the video input Page 154  
(1) Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Touch the source icon and touch [AV  
INPUT].  
(2) External unit indicator  
Displays any connected external units.  
Page 99  
Touch key operation  
Operating the External Unit  
(EXT)  
1 Touch the source icon and then touch  
[EXT 1] or [EXT 2] to select the external  
unit.  
The term [external unit] refers to future Pioneer  
devices that are not currently planned for, or  
although devices are not fully controlled by this  
navigation system, devices enable control of  
basic functions. Two external units can be con-  
trolled by this navigation system. When two exter-  
nal units are connected, the navigation system  
allocates them to external unit 1 or external unit  
2. For details concerning operation, refer to the  
external unit’s operation manual. This section  
provides information on external unit operations  
with navigation system that differ from those  
described in the external unit’s operation man-  
ual.  
When the source icon is not displayed, you  
can display it by touching the screen.  
Touch keys  
(2)  
(1)  
(4)  
(3)  
Operation varies depending on the external  
unit connected. (In some cases, the external  
unit may not respond.)  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
(1) Sending an , , , or command  
Touch to operate the external unit.  
Operate the external unit by  
using Function 1 — Function 4  
Operation varies depending on the external  
unit connected. (In some cases, some func-  
tions may not be used until you touch and  
hold the key.)  
The external unit can be operated by transmitting  
the operating commands set to Function 1 —  
Function 4.  
The operating commands set to Function 1  
Function 4 vary depending on the external  
unit.  
(2) Sending a band command  
Touch to send a band command to the external  
unit.  
1 Touch [Function].  
Operation varies depending on the external  
unit connected. (In some cases, the external  
unit may not respond.)  
2 Touch [Function 1, 2, 3 or 4].  
(3) Sending a 1 key to 6 key command  
“Operate the external unit by using 1 key — 6  
(4) Operate the external unit by using Func-  
tion 1 to Function 4 key and Auto/Manual key  
“Operate the external unit by using Function 1  
The operation command is transmitted to the  
external unit.  
— Function 4” Page 144  
“Switching the automatic and manual func-  
Some functions may not be used until you  
touch and hold the key.  
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[Back].  
Operate the external unit by  
using 1 key — 6 key  
Switching the automatic and  
manual function  
The external unit can be operated by transmitting  
the operating commands set to 1 key — 6 key.  
You can turn automatic and manual function on  
or off. You can switch between Auto and Manual  
functions of the external unit connected. Initially,  
this function is set to Auto.  
1 Touch [1 — 6 ].  
2 Touch desired key ([1 — 6 ]) to operate  
the external unit.  
Operating commands set for Auto and Man-  
ual operations vary depending on the external  
unit connected.  
1 Touch [Function].  
2 Touch [Auto/Manual].  
Touching [Auto/Manual] switches between  
[Auto] and [Manual].  
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[Back].  
Operation varies depending on the exter-  
nal unit connected. (In some cases, the  
external unit may not respond.)  
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[Back].  
Operation varies depending on the exter-  
nal unit connected. (In some cases, some  
functions may not be used until you touch  
and hold the key.)  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Operating the AUX input source  
(AUX)  
An IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-  
RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect  
your navigation system to auxiliary equipment  
featuring RCA output. For more details, refer to  
the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector owner’s manual.  
Selecting [AUX] as the source  
1 [AUX Input] is set to [On].  
“Switching the auxiliary setting” ➞  
Page 155  
2 Touch the source icon and touch [AUX].  
Page 99  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 16  
Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual  
Various settings are available with the audio  
How to operate the Audio Set-  
tings screen  
source according to your audiovisual requests.  
This chapter describes the methods of changing  
the various settings and how to set of the LCD  
1 Press the AV button.  
The Navigation screen changes to the Audio  
panel.  
source screen (of any source).  
AV SETTING overview  
2 Touch [AV Settings].  
The AV Settings screen appears.  
The audio visual setting is divided into [Audio  
Settings] and [System Settings].  
3 Touch the item you want to change.  
Audio Settings screen  
4 Change Setting.  
(E.g. Equalizer screen)  
System Settings screen  
Touch [ESC] to return to the selected  
source screen currently.  
Operation for [Audio Settings] Page 147  
Touch [Back] to return to the AV Settings  
screen.  
Operation for [System Settings] Page 151  
When Pre Out (the subwoofer controller set-  
ting in System Settings menu) is Full, the  
Non Fading will be displayed instead of Sub  
Woofer.  
Customizing the Audio Settings  
Items  
Using the equalizer  
“Setting the rear output and subwoofer con-  
The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to  
match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics as  
desired.  
troller” Page 156  
When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you  
cannot select [Source Level].  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
izer curve settings will be memorized in  
Custom1.  
Recalling equalizer curves  
There are six stored equalizer curves which you  
can easily recall. Here is a list of the equalizer  
curves:  
• A Custom2 curve can be created common to  
all sources. If you make adjustments when the  
Custom2 curve is selected, the Custom2  
curve will be updated.  
Equalizer curve  
Super Bass  
Super Bass is a curve in which only lowrange is  
boosted.  
The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized for  
each of the source selected, but one curve is  
shared for the following sources.  
Powerful (Default)  
Powerful is a curve in which lowrange and highrange  
sounds are boosted.  
In the built-in DVD drive, different curves can  
be memorized for a DVD-Video and a CD (CD-  
DA or MP3).  
Natural  
Natural is a curve in which lowrange and highrange  
sounds are slightly boosted.  
AM and FM  
EXT 1 and EXT 2  
Vocal  
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange sounds, such  
as the human vocal range, is boosted.  
AUX and AV INPUT  
You can adjust the center frequency, level and  
Flat  
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.  
the Q (curve characteristics) of each band  
Custom1  
(Low/Mid/High).  
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. A separate custom curve can be created.  
Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equalizer curves  
that you create. Adjustments can be made with a 3-  
bandparametric equalizer.  
Custom2  
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all  
audio source.  
Band:  
1 Touch [Equalizer] in the Audio Settings  
menu.  
You can select the band you want to adjust.  
Frequency:  
You can select which frequency to be set as  
2 Touch desired equalizer.  
the center frequency.  
Level:  
You can adjust the decibel (dB) level of the  
selected band.  
Q:  
You can select the details of the curve char-  
acteristics. (The following figure shows the  
characteristic image.)  
When Flat is selected, no supplement or  
correction is made to the sound. This is  
useful to check the effect of the equalizer  
curves by switching alternatively between  
Flat and a set equalizer curve.  
Adjusting equalizer curves  
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer  
curve setting as desired.  
• A separate Custom1 curve can be created for  
each source. If you make adjustments when a  
curve Super Bass, Powerful, Natural,  
Vocal, Flat, or Custom1 is selected,the equal-  
1 Touch [Equalizer] in the Audio Settings  
menu.  
2 Touch [Customize].  
The details setting screen appears.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Touch or to select the equalizer band  
to adjust.  
“Using the high pass filter” Page 150  
Adjusting a position effect  
You can select a listener position that you want to  
Each time you touch or selects equalizer  
bands in the following order:  
Low Mid High  
make as the center of sound effects.  
1 Touch [Staging] in the Audio Settings  
menu.  
4 Touch or to select the desired center  
frequency.  
Low: 40 — 80 — 100 — 160 (Hz)  
Mid: 200 — 500 — 1K — 2K (Hz)  
High: 3.15K — 8K — 10K — 12.5K (Hz)  
2 Touch [Position].  
3 Touch desired position.  
5 Touch or to adjust the level of the  
equalizer band.  
Each time you touch or increases or  
decreases the level of the equalization band.  
12dB to –12dB is displayed as the level is  
increased or decreased.  
6 Touch or to select the desired [Q].  
Touch or until the desired the curve char-  
acteristics appears in the display.  
Wide2 — Wide1 — Narrow1 — Narrow2  
To adjust other bands, repeat step 2 to step  
6.  
Using balance adjustment  
You can select a fader/balance setting that pro-  
vides an ideal listening environment in all occu-  
pied seats.  
1 Touch [FAD/BAL] in the Audio Settings  
menu.  
Setting the simulated sound  
stage  
The FAD/BAL screen appears. When Rear SP  
(the subwoofer controller setting in System  
Settings menu) is Sub.W, the Balance will  
be displayed instead of FAD/BAL.  
“Setting the rear output and subwoofer  
controller” Page 156  
You can select the desired effect from various  
simulated sound stage, such as Music Studio or  
Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a listener  
positioning effect.  
Setting a stage that fits your image  
2 Touch or to adjust front/rear speaker  
balance.  
1 Touch [Staging] in the Audio Settings  
menu.  
Each time you touch or moves the front/  
rear speaker balance towards the front or the  
rear.  
2 Touch desired stage setting.  
Front: 15 to Rear: 15 is displayed as the  
front/rear speaker balance moves from front  
to rear.  
The [Living Room] setting that empha-  
sizes midrange sound hardly has any  
effect near the maximum volume level.  
When you set staging other than [Off], the  
high pass filter (HPF) setting turns [Off].  
When the rear output setting is Rear SP  
Sub.W, you cannot adjust front/rear speaker  
balance.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
“Setting the rear output and subwoofer  
1 Touch [Non Fading] in the Audio Settings  
menu.  
controller” Page 156  
Only when Preout (the subwoofer controller  
setting in System Settings menu) is Full,  
you can select [Non Fading].  
3 Touch or to adjust left/right speaker  
balance.  
Each time you touch or moves the left/  
right speaker balance towards the left or the  
right.  
Rear speaker setting Page 156  
2 Touch [On] to turn non fading output on.  
To turn non fading output off, touch [Off].  
Left: 9 to Right: 9 is displayed as the left/  
right speaker balance moves from left to right.  
3 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the output level  
of the non fading.  
Using subwoofer output  
+6 to –6 is displayed as the level is increased  
or decreased.  
The navigation system is equipped with a sub-  
woofer output which can be turned on or off.  
When the subwoofer output is on, you can  
adjust the cut-off frequency, the output level,  
and the phase of the subwoofer.  
Adjusting loudness  
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the  
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.  
1 Touch [Sub Woofer] in the Audio Settings  
menu.  
1 Touch [Loudness] in the Audio Settings  
menu.  
When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-  
ting in System Settings menu) is Full, you  
cannot select [Sub Woofer].  
2 Touch [On] to turn loudness on.  
To turn loudness off, touch [Off].  
Rear speaker setting Page 156  
3 Touch or to select a desired level.  
Each time you touch or selects level in  
the following order:  
2 Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output on.  
To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].  
Low Mid High  
3 Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select the  
phase of subwoofer output.  
Using the high pass filter  
If subwoofer output sound is not clear with  
[Normal], change it to [Reverse].  
When you do not want low sounds from the sub-  
woofer output frequency range to play from the  
front or rear speakers, turn the HPF (high pass fil-  
ter) on. Only frequencies higher than those in the  
selected range are output from the front or rear  
speakers.  
4 Touch or to select cut-off frequency.  
Each time you touch or selects cut-off fre-  
quencies in the following order:  
50 80 125 (Hz)  
Only frequencies lower than those in the  
selected range are output from the subwoofer.  
1 Touch [HPF] in the Audio Settings menu.  
2 Touch [On] to turn high pass filter on.  
5 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the output level  
of the subwoofer.  
To turn high pass filter off, touch [Off].  
+6 to –6 is displayed as the level is increased  
or decreased.  
3 Touch or to select cut-off frequency.  
Each time you touch or selects cut-off fre-  
quencies in the following order:  
Using non fading output  
50 80 125 (Hz)  
When the non fading output setting is on, the  
audio signal does not pass through navigation  
system’s low pass filter (for the subwoofer), but is  
output through the RCA output.  
When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-  
ting in System Settings menu) is Sub.W,  
the HPF function is effective for front speak-  
ers only.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
If you change the acoustic field after you set it  
Customizing the System Set-  
tings Items  
once, the high pass filter (HPF) setting turns Off.  
System Settings lets you perform system set up  
of different settings for navigation system.  
Adjusting source levels  
Source Level (source level adjustment) lets you  
adjust the volume level of each source to prevent  
radical changes in volume when switching  
between sources.  
How to view and operate the  
System Settings  
Settings are based on the FM tuner volume  
1 Press the AV button.  
level, which remains unchanged.  
The Navigation screen changes to the Audio  
source screen (of any source).  
1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with  
the level of the source you wish to adjust.  
2 Touch [AV Settings].  
The AV Settings screen appears.  
2 Touch [Source Level] in the Audio Set-  
tings menu.  
3 Touch [System Settings].  
3 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the source vol-  
ume.  
+8 to –8 is displayed as the source volume is  
increased or decreased.  
Sources are set to same source level adjust-  
ment volume automatically.  
CD and ROM (MP3)  
XM and SIRIUS  
4 Touch the item you want to change.  
The setting change screen appears, or the set-  
ting changes by toggling it.  
EXT 1 and EXT 2  
AUX and AV INPUT  
Touch  
or  
to move to the  
next or previous page.  
5 Change Setting.  
Touch [ESC] to return to the selected  
source screen.  
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[Back].  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting assist subtitles on or off  
Assist subtitles offer explanations for the aurally  
impaired. However, they are only displayed if they  
are recorded on the DVD.  
Setting up the built-in DVD  
drive  
You can change the preference for playing a DVD  
on the built-in DVD drive.  
You can turn assist subtitles on or off as desired.  
You can use this menu to change audio, subtitle,  
parental lock, and other DVD settings.  
Some changings or settings which you have set  
here, may be invalid depending on the features of  
the DVD disc. For details, see the disc’s instruc-  
tions.  
1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
2 Touch [Assist Subtitle].  
Touching [Assist Subtitle] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
You can enter this menu while [DVD] is  
selected as audio source.  
Setting angle icon display  
You can set to display the angle icon  
on  
If you can enter this menu during DVD play-  
back, playback will be stopped and return to  
the first chapter.  
scenes where the angle can be switched.  
1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
Setting the language  
You can set each desired language for subtitle,  
audio, and menu. If the selected language is  
recorded on the DVD, subtitles, audio, menu are  
displayed in that language.  
2 Touch [Multi Angle].  
Touching [Multi Angle] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
Setting the aspect ratio  
1 Switch the audio source to [DVD].  
There are two kinds of display. A wide screen dis-  
play has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of  
16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of  
4:3. If you use regular rear display has a TV aspect  
of 4:3, you can set the aspect radio suitable for  
your rear display. (We recommend use this func-  
tion only when you want to fit it to rear display.)  
2 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
3 Touch [Subtitle Language], [Audio Lan-  
guage] or [Menu Language].  
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-  
rently set language is selected.  
When using a regular display, select either  
Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting 16:9 may  
result in an unnatural picture.  
4 Touch the desired language.  
When you select [Others], a language code  
input display is shown. Input the four digit  
code of the desired language then touch  
[Enter].  
1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
“Language code chart for DVD” ➞  
Page 159  
2 Touch [TV Aspect].  
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
If the selected language is not recorded on  
the disc, the default language specified on  
the disc is output and displayed.  
You can also switch the subtitle and audio  
language by touching [Subtitle] or  
[Audio] during playback.  
16:9 — Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-  
played as it is (initial setting)  
Letter Box — The picture is in the shape of  
a letter box with black bands at the top and  
bottom of the screen  
Panscan — The picture is cut short at the  
right and left of the screen  
Changing the subtitle language during  
playback (Multi-subtitle) Page 108  
Changing audio language during play-  
back (Multi-audio) Page 108  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
When playing discs don’t have panscan  
system, playback is with [Letter Box] even  
if you select the [Panscan] setting. Con-  
firm whether the disc package bears like  
16 : 9 LB  
The parental lock level is recorded on the  
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the  
disc package, included literature or on the  
disc itself. With discs that do not feature a  
recorded parental lock level, you cannot  
use parental lock.  
the  
mark.  
Setting the parental lock  
With some discs, parental lock operates to  
skip certain scenes only, after which nor-  
mal playback resumes. For details, refer to  
the disc’s instructions.  
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental lock  
to give an restriction so that children can not  
watch a violent and adult oriented scenes. You  
can set the parental lock level in steps as desired.  
If you forget the registered code number,  
touch [Clear] 10 times on the screen in the  
Step 3. The registered code number is can-  
celed, letting you register a new one.  
When you set a parental lock level and then  
play a disc featuring parental lock, code num-  
ber input indications may be displayed. In this  
case, playback will begin when the correct  
code number is input.  
Changing the wide screen mode  
Setting the code number and level  
When you first use this function, register your  
code number. If you do not register a code num-  
ber, parental lock will not operate.  
• For safety reasons, these functions are not  
available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop  
in a safe place and put on the parking  
brake before setting your route (see page  
18 Interlock for details).  
1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
2 Touch [Parental Level].  
3 Touch 0 — 9 to input a four digit code  
number.  
1 Touch [Wide Mode] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
The Wide Mode screen appears.  
On the Wide Mode screen, you can select the  
following items:  
4 While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The code number is registered, and you can  
now set the level.  
Full, Just, Cinema, Zoom or Normal  
Normal (normal):  
5 Touch any of 1 — 8 to select the desired  
level.  
A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no  
sense of disparity since its proportions are the  
same as that of the normal picture.  
The parental lock level is set.  
Level 8 — Playback of the entire disc is  
possible (initial setting)  
Full (full):  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal  
direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV  
picture (normal picture) without any omis-  
sions.  
Level 7 Level 2 — Playback of discs for  
children and non-adult oriented discs is  
possible  
Level 1 — Playback of discs for children  
only is possible  
If you want to change the parental level,  
Just (just):  
enter the registered code number in the  
Step 3.  
The picture is enlarged slightly at the center  
and the amount of enlargement increases  
horizontally toward the ends of the picture,  
enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without  
sensing any disparity even on a wide screen.  
We recommend to keep a record of your  
code number in case you forget it.  
Cinema (cinema):  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A picture is enlarged by the same proportion  
as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction  
and by an intermediate proportion between  
Full and Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal  
for a cinema-sized picture (wide screen pic-  
ture) where captions lie outside the frame.  
• Pioneer recommends the use of a camera  
which outputs mirror reversed images,  
otherwise screen image may appear  
reversed.  
Zoom (zoom):  
Immediately confirm whether the display  
changes to a rear view camera image when  
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R) from  
another position.  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same propor-  
tion both vertically and horizontally; ideal for a  
cinema-sized picture (wide screen picture).  
Different settings can be memorized for  
each video source.  
When the screen changes to full-screen rear  
view camera image during normal driving,  
switch to the opposite setting.  
When video is viewed in a wide screen  
mode that does not match its original  
aspect ratio, it may appear differently.  
Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may  
constitute an infringement on the author’s  
rights protected by the Copyright Law.  
Video will appear grainy when viewed in  
Cinema or Zoom mode.  
Initially, this function is set to On.  
1 Touch [Camera Input] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
2 Touch [On] to turn rear view camera set-  
ting on.  
Unless this setting is [On], you cannot  
switch to Rear View mode.  
The navigation map and the rear view cam-  
era picture is always Full.  
3 Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriate  
setting for polarity.  
Setting for rear view camera  
Each time you touch [Polarity] switches  
between the following polarity:  
The following two functions are available. The  
rear view camera feature requires a separately  
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC1). (For details,  
consult your dealer.)  
Battery — When the polarity of the con-  
nected lead is positive while the shift lever  
is in the REVERSE (R) position  
GND — When the polarity of the connected  
lead is negative while the shift lever is in the  
REVERSE (R) position  
Camera for backing up  
The navigation system features a function that  
automatically switches to the full-screen rear  
camera image installed on your vehicle. When  
the shift lever is in REVERSE (R) position, the  
screen automatically switches to full-screen rear  
view camera.  
Setting the video input  
You can switch the setting according to the con-  
nected component.  
Select [Video] to watch video of a connected  
Camera for Rear view mode  
component as AV source.  
[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g.  
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a  
split screen where map information is partially  
displayed. Please be aware that in this setting,  
camera image is not resized to fit, but that a por-  
tion of what is seen by the camera is not view-  
able.  
1 Touch [AV Input] in the System Settings  
menu.  
Each touch of [AV Input] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
Off — No video component is connected  
Video — External video component  
EXT — Pioneer external unit connected  
with RCA video cable  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
When a Pioneer external unit is connected  
with an IP-BUS cable, select [EXT]. When  
the audio source is [EXT], the “Video  
image” of the Pioneer external unit can be  
displayed.  
Operation returns to normal when the cor-  
respond action is ended.  
Even when navigation voice guidance itself  
cannot be attenuated or muted. If you want  
to mute the navigation guidance voice  
temporarily, use  
screen.  
on the navigation map  
Switching the auxiliary setting  
It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with navi-  
gation system as the one of source. Activate the  
auxiliary setting when using auxiliary equipment  
connected to the navigation system.  
Switching the muting/attenua-  
tion level  
You can select the muting/attenuation level of  
[Mute Set]. This setting is also effected for the  
mute signal has been received from the CELLU-  
LAR MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.  
This menu is not available in the following  
cases :  
1 Touch [AUX Input] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
Touching [AUX Input] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
Selecting AUX as the source Page 145  
— Audio source is [OFF]  
— During muting/attenuation  
Switching the muting/attenua-  
tion timing  
— [5.1Ch Setup] is [On]  
1 Touch [Mute Level] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
You can select the audio source volume is muted  
or attenuated what signal is output. This setting  
is invalid for the mute signal has been received  
from the CELLULAR MUTE lead connected to the  
navigation unit. (Even if this setting is [Off], the  
navigation system will mute or attenuate the  
audio source volume, when the signal via CELLU-  
LAR MUTE lead is output.)  
Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
All — The volume becomes 0  
–20dB — The volume becomes 1/10  
–10dB — The volume becomes 1/3  
When you select [All], [Mute] is displayed  
and no audio adjustments are possible  
during the sound is turned off.  
1 Touch [Mute Set] in the System Settings  
menu.  
When you select [–20dB] or [–10dB], no  
audio adjustments, except volume control,  
are possible during the sound is attenu-  
ated.  
Each touch of [Mute Set] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
Guide/Tel/VR — The volume is muted or  
attenuated by the following condition  
— When the navigation outputs the guidance  
Operation returns to normal when the cor-  
respond action is ended.  
voice.  
Even when a mute signal has been  
received from the CELLULAR MUTE lead  
connected to the navigation unit, naviga-  
tion voice guidance cannot be attenuated  
or muted. If you want to mute the naviga-  
tion guidance voice temporarily, use  
on the navigation map screen.  
— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-  
tooth technology (dialing, talking, incoming  
call).  
— When the voice recognition mode is acti-  
vated.  
Tel/VR — The volume is muted or attenu-  
ated by the following condition  
— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-  
tooth technology (dialing, talking, incoming  
call).  
— When the voice recognition mode is acti-  
vated.  
Off — The Volume does not change  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Changing the voice output of the  
navigation guidance  
Setting the CD recording mode  
You can set whether to start recording tracks  
automatically when you plays a CD, or to manu-  
ally trigger recording.  
You can set the speaker to output the navigation  
guidance and phone voice, etc.  
1 Touch [REC Mode] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
1 Touch [Guide/Tel SP] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
Each touch of [REC Mode] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
Each touch of [Guide/Tel SP] changes the  
settings as follows:  
Auto — Records the tracks automatically  
when a CD is played  
Manual — Lets you select the tracks you  
want to record manually, and records them  
Single — Automatically records only the  
first track of the CD  
Left SP — Uses only the front left speaker  
Right SP — Uses only the front right  
speaker  
L+R SP — Uses both the front right and  
left speakers  
Switching the auto antenna set-  
ting  
Setting the rear output and sub-  
woofer controller  
If the blue lead of the navigation system is con-  
nected to the auto antenna of the vehicle, select  
either of the following settings.  
The navigation system’s rear output can be used  
for full-range speaker or subwoofer connection. If  
you switch Rear SP setting to the Sub.W, you  
can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a sub-  
woofer without using an auxiliary amp.  
Radio — Extends the antenna only for the FM  
or AM source. The antenna is stored when the  
source is switched to another.  
Initially, navigation system is set for rear fullrange  
speaker connection. When rear output is con-  
nected to fullrange speakers (when Rear SP set-  
ting is Full), you can connect the RCA subwoofer  
output (description on the label) to a subwoofer.  
In this case, you can select whether to use the  
subwoofer controller’s (low pass filter, phase)  
built-in amp of the navigation system or the auxil-  
iary amp or subwoofer.  
Power — Extends the antenna when the igni-  
tion switch is turned on. The antenna is stored  
when the ignition switch is turned off.  
1 Touch [Auto ANT] in the System Set-  
tings.  
Touching [Auto ANT] switches between  
[Radio] and [Power].  
Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]  
is selected, turning off the ignition switch  
will cause the antenna to automatically  
retract.  
If you change the subwoofer controller [Rear  
SP] or [Preout], [Sub Woofer] or [Non Fad-  
ing] in the Audio Settings menu return to  
the factory settings.  
Setting the clock display on the  
video image  
Both rear speaker leads output and RCA rear  
output are switched simultaneously in this  
setting.  
You can select whether to display the clock on  
the video image screen without touch keys, such  
as DVD-Video, AV INPUT, or TV tuner.  
Rear SP can be set only when the source is  
OFF.  
1 Touch [Clock DISP] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
Touching [Clock DISP] switches between  
[All SCRN] and [Audio SCRN].  
All SCRN — The clock is overlaid on the  
“Video image”  
Audio SCRN — The clock is not overlaid  
on the “Video image”  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
1 Touch [Rear SP] in the System Settings  
menu.  
2 Touch [5.1Ch Setup] in the System Set-  
tings menu.  
If you touch [5.1Ch Setup], it will be turned  
[On]. If you touch [5.1Ch Setup] again to turn  
[Off] the setting, [5.1Ch Setup] will disap-  
pear. If you want to turn it [On] again, you  
have to repeat the procedure from the Step1.  
2 Touch [Full] or [Sub.W] to switch the rear  
output setting.  
When no subwoofer is connected to the  
rear output, select Full. When a subwoofer  
is connected to the rear speaker leads  
directly, select Sub.W.  
Other Functions  
3 Touch [Preout] to switch the subwoofer  
output or non fading output.  
Selecting the video for “Rear  
display”  
When the [Rear SP] setting is Sub.W,  
[Preout] is invalid.  
You can choose either to show the same image  
as the front screen or to show the selected  
source on the “Rear display”.  
Even if you change this setting, there is no  
output unless you turn [Non Fading] or  
[Sub Woofer] in the Audio Settings  
menu [On].  
1 Touch the source icon and then touch  
[REAR SCREEN].  
“Using non fading output” Page 150  
“Using subwoofer output” Page 150  
Each touch of [REAR SCREEN] changes the  
settings as follows:  
MIRROR — The video on the front screen  
of the navigation unit is output to the “Rear  
display”  
DVD — The video and sound of the DVDs  
are output to the “Rear display”  
Switching the 5.1ch setting  
When the navigation system is combined with  
the multi-channel processor system (sold sepa-  
rately), you can use the multi-channel sound.  
Enter the following setting when combining the  
multi-channel processor system.  
AV — The video and sound of the AV  
INPUT are output to the “Rear display”  
When MIRROR is selected, the following  
restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.  
— The TV tuner connected with AV-BUS, its  
“Video image” cannot be output. (Connect  
with TV tuner’s rear output to “Rear display”  
directly.)  
• DO NOT enter this setting before you con-  
nect the multi-channel processor system.  
(If this setting is entered, the Front RCA  
will output maximum volume for the multi-  
channel processor system.) Pioneer is not  
responsible for any damage to the speaker  
equipment caused by ignoring this warn-  
ing.  
— When selecting Rear View in the map dis-  
play, nothing is displayed.  
— All sounds cannot be output for “Rear dis-  
play”.  
— There is no picture on “Rear display” while  
[Picture Adjust] for [Back-Camera] is car-  
ried out.  
This setting is possible only when the optical  
cable connection box (supplied with the Multi-  
channel processor) is connected to the navi-  
gation system.  
— The map screen navigation images output  
to the “Rear display” differ from standard  
NTSC format images. Therefore, their quality  
will be inferior to the images that appear on  
the front screen.  
1 Touch the source icon and then touch  
[OFF] to turn source off.  
When DVD is selected, the following  
restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.  
— When the CD or MP3 disc is set in the built-  
in DVD drive, nothing is output.  
When the source icon is not displayed, you  
can display it by touching the screen.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
When AV is selected, the following restric-  
tions are applied to “Rear display”.  
— The “Video image” and sound are output  
only when the AV INPUT has them.  
— The “Video image” and sound are output  
only when the appropriate setting on [AV  
Input] is [Video].  
You cannot adjust Color and Hue for the  
source without a video and navigation map  
display.  
The setting contents can be memorized  
separately for the following screen and the  
“Video image”.  
AM/FM/M-CD/iPod/AUX/XM/SIRIUS  
screen  
LIBRARY (Music Library) screen  
— Built-in DVD drive  
Operating the picture adjust-  
ment  
TV image  
AV Input/EXT  
— Rear view camera image  
• For safety reasons, these functions are not  
available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop  
in a safe place and put on the parking  
brake before setting your route (see page  
18 Interlock for details).  
— Navigation map and menu screen  
The picture adjustment may not be able to  
be used with some rear view cameras.  
Because of the LCD screen characteris-  
tics, you may not be able to adjust the  
screen at low temperatures.  
You can adjust for each source and rear view  
camera.  
2 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the desired  
item.  
Each time you touch [+] or [] increases or  
decreases the level of desired item.  
1 Press the V button to display Picture  
Adjust screen.  
3 Touch [ESC] to return to the previous  
screen.  
Switching the Backlight On/Off  
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,  
you can turn off the screen display without turn-  
ing off the voice guidance.  
Brightness — Adjusts the black intensity  
Contrast — Adjusts the contrast  
Color — Adjusts the color saturation  
Hue — Adjusts the tone of color (red is  
emphasized or green is emphasized)  
Dimmer — Adjusts the brightness of dis-  
play  
1 Press and hold the V button.  
The backlight turns off, and the screen turns  
off.  
Press the V button once again to turn on  
the backlight, and the screen is displayed.  
Back-Camera — Shows the picture adjust-  
ment display for the rear view camera  
Touching [Source] while adjusting the  
rear view camera image returns you to the  
previous screen.  
The adjustments of Brightness, Contrast  
and Dimmer are stored separately when  
your vehicle is headlight is on (daytime)  
and when your vehicle’s headlight is off  
(nighttime). These are switched automati-  
cally depending on the condition of the  
vehicle’s headlight.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Language Code Chart for DVD  
Language (code), input code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
Language (code), input code  
Language (code), input code  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Rumanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Spanish (es), 0519  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Greek (el), 0512  
Sango (sg), 1907  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Shinghalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Belorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Latin (la), 1201  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Laotian (lo), 1215  
Thai (th), 2008  
Lithusnian (lt), 1220  
Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tongan (to), 2015  
Turkish (tr), 2018  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Czach (cs), 0319  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Tatar (tt), 2020  
Danish (da), 0401  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapu˜k (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
(Afan) Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Polish (pl), 1612  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
To Ensure Safe Driving  
1 Touch VOICE icon to activate voice  
operation.  
• For safety reasons, Voice Help menu  
(Voice Recog.Help) is not available while  
your vehicle is in motion. To enable this  
function, you must stop in a safe place and  
put on the parking brake before setting  
your route.  
2 Speak a command into the micro-  
phone after the beep.  
3 When the command is recognized, the  
navigation system displays the  
response message on the screen, and  
pronounces it in some cases.  
Basics of Voice Operation  
Your Pioneer navigation system uses with the lat-  
est in voice recognition technology. You can use  
voice commands to operate many of its func-  
tions. This chapter describes where you can use  
voice commands, and also what commands the  
system accepts.  
4 As necessary, repeat Steps 3.  
5 The requested operation will be car-  
ried out.  
Flow of voice operation  
The voice operation may not enable for a  
minute after the navigation system has booted  
up.  
You can start voice operation any time even when  
the map screen is displayed or audio is operated.  
(Some operations are not available.) The basic  
steps of voice operation are as follows.  
If you operate using the “CD-SR1” Steering  
Remote Control (sold separately), the follow-  
ing buttons can be used for operation:  
VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:  
Same function as VOICE icon.  
VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:  
Return to previous screen.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
When you say [Voice Help], the navigation  
system pronounces the displayed words that  
can be vocalized.  
To start voice operation  
No sounds can be out put during  
.
If no voice icon is displayed, check to see  
whether the microphone is properly con-  
nected and turn the power on again.  
1 Touch VOICE icon.  
Navigation screen  
If there are too many items to list, voice help  
menu can be switched by using  
on the screen.  
or  
To cancel voice operation  
You can cancel voice operation features at any  
time by saying [Cancel]. After you cancel voice  
operation, the map is displayed.  
Audio screen  
If no command is made in the next 6 seconds,  
voice recognition is canceled and the naviga-  
tion system is on hold until the next operation.  
Touch VOICE icon to reactivate voice opera-  
tion.  
Depending on the operating state of the navi-  
gation system, some commands displayed in  
Voice Help may be unavailable. Available  
commands are in white and unavailable com-  
mands are in grey.  
When using voice operation for the first  
time  
Until you are familiar with this system, it is rec-  
ommended to stop the vehicle in a safe place and  
refer to the commands displayed in the Voice  
Help menu (a list of the words you can speak).  
When your vehicle is parked with the parking  
brake on, see the Voice Help menu and speak  
voice command on that menu (except for some  
case).  
Voice Help menu  
VOICE icon  
When voice command is possible  
When voice command is not accepted  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tips for Voice Operation  
An Example of Voice Operation  
Search for POI in vicinity  
For your voice commands to be correctly recog-  
nized and interpreted, ensure that conditions are  
suitable for recognition.  
In this example, you want to search for the near-  
est gas station and set as your destination.  
Reduce the volume setting on your  
vehicle audio system  
Give the following verbal commands after  
switching to the navigation screen.  
The sound volume is automatically reduced  
“Voice commands related to navigation” ➞  
during voice operation Page 91  
Page 165  
Close the vehicle windows  
1 Press the MAP button to display the navi-  
gation map screen.  
Please note that wind through the vehicle win-  
dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the  
vehicle can interfere with voice operation.  
2 Touch VOICE icon.  
A list of commands for voice operation  
appears. After the message, the beep indi-  
cates that the system is ready to accept your  
voice command. Say a command after this  
beep.  
Position the microphone carefully  
For optimum pick-up, the microphone should be  
fixed at a suitable distance directly in front of the  
driver.  
Pause before giving a command  
Speaking too soon may cause the recognition to  
fail.  
3 Say “Destination”.  
Pronounce your commands carefully  
Speak slowly, deliberately and clearly.  
If the registered voice command and the  
default voice command is the same, the regis-  
tered voice command will take priority. In this  
case, the default voice command will not  
function. To use the default voice command,  
change or delete the registered voice com-  
mand that is identical to the default voice  
command.  
A message to prompt the next operation is  
given.  
4 Say “Vicinity Search”.  
Say correspond commands for the function  
you want to operate. Here, the selection  
method of your destination is specified. When  
you want to search the gas station nearest to  
the current location, say “Vicinity Search”.  
The message “Vicinity search. Please  
request POI category.” appears, and the  
navigation system pronounces that message.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 Say “GAS Station”.  
Search for the playlist  
The message “Vicinity search. (gas sta-  
tion)” appears.  
In this example, you want to search for the playl-  
ist and play that.  
The map of the nearest gas station is shown.  
1 Touch VOICE icon when the audio source  
is “LIBRARY”.  
2 Say “Music Search”.  
3 Say desired group.  
For categories which can be used as the  
voice commands, refer to “Category list for  
vicinity search”.  
Refer to “Category list for vicinity search”  
Page 172  
If desired group is already selected, you  
6 Touch VOICE icon.  
can skip this step.  
7 Say “Next” or “Previous” to select the  
desired facilities.  
4 Say the playlist name you want to play.  
You can switch the page by using  
on the screen.  
or  
8 After confirming the location, say “Set As  
Destination”.  
You can also search the track in the cur-  
rent playlist with saying “Track Search”.  
9 Touch VOICE icon.  
The message “Starting route calculation.”  
appears, and the navigation system pro-  
nounces that message.  
With the location shown on the map set as the  
destination (or waypoint), the route calcula-  
tion starts.  
If you say “Back”, return the previous  
screen.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Voice Operation  
This section describes the flow and available commands of each voice operation.  
During the voice operation, location screen (A) or (B) may appear. In such a case, go to “Location  
Screen (A) and (B)” in the later section, and continue the voice operation.  
Location Screen (A) and (B) Page 168  
For <City Name>,<Street Name>,<house number> or <POI Name> shown on the following  
chart, say their real name or number which you want to search for. For example, if the real POI  
name is “Pioneer” and you want to operate “Go to <POI Name>”, say “Go to Pioneer”.  
For <Registered location’s pronounce > shown on the following chart, say the registered pro-  
nounce. For example, if the registered pronounce in address book is “My office” and you want to  
operate “Go to <Registered location’s pronounce >”, say “Go to My office”. In addition, this com-  
mand can be used only with the selected language when you register.  
For <Album playlist name>, <Artist playlist name >, <Genre playlist name> , <Track name>  
shown on the following chart, say their name in the music library (if you edited their pronounce, say  
their pronounce.) . In addition, this command can be used only with the selected language when  
you register.  
For <Category Name>, <Sub Category Name> in “Vicinity Search”, refer to “The list of categories  
which you can say in “Vicinity Search” and say the desired category in that list.  
You can skip the commands with the mark (*). For example, in case search by Point of interest, the  
system can recognize the command even if you say “POI” without saying “Destination”.  
If some candidates have been found, the candidate list appears. Select the one from the list and pro-  
ceed to next step.  
The voice operation related the telephone is available only when the condition under the hands-free  
phoning feature of this system can be operated and unavailable during a call.  
Voice commands related to navigation  
Give the following verbal commands after switching to the navigation screen.  
Search by address  
Destination* Address <City Name> <Street Name> <House number> Location Screen (A)  
Notes:  
• Select the state, province or territory manually before the voice operation.  
• When you say the street name, say the street type together <e.g. XXXX street, xxxx avenue, xxxx road, xxxxx boule-  
vard, etc. >  
• Some operation may be skipped depending on the address.  
• If you don’t know the street name or house number, you can say “Area” so that your destination can be set to the  
main point of that city or street.  
Search by Points of interest  
Destination* POI <POI Name> Location Screen (A)  
Destination* POI Go To <POI Name> If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.  
If there is no route, the system starts the route calculation.  
Destination* POI Waypoint <POI name> Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.  
Destination* POI Call <POI name> Touch VOICE icon to call that facility. Only when the cellular phone fea-  
turing Bluetooth technology is available.  
Destination* POI Display <POI name> Display the map of that facility’s surroundings.  
Search by telephone number  
Destination* Telephone Number Location Screen (A) (If multiple facilities exist with the same phone number,  
the facilities you intend may not be displayed.)  
Note:  
You can say 10 digits telephone number only. 911 and the number other than 10 digits is not available.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Search by entry on the address book  
Destination* Address Book <Registered location name> Location Screen (A)  
<Registered location name> Location Screen (A)  
Destination* Go To <Registered location name> If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route cal-  
culation. If there is no route, the system starts the route calculation.  
Destination* Waypoint <Registered location name> Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.  
Making phone call to entry on the address book  
Destination* Call <Registered location name> Touch VOICE icon to call that facility (Only when the phone  
number is registered in the entry.)  
Displaying the map of the entry on the address book  
Destination* Display <Registered location name> Display the map of surroundings on that facility.  
Search the facilities in vicinity  
Destination* Vicinity Search [Category Name]/[Sub Category Name] Location Screen (B)  
Displaying the destination history  
Destination* Destination History Display the Destination History screen.  
Setting the route to your home  
Destination* Return Home If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (If there is no  
route, the system starts the route calculation.)  
Making phone call to your home  
Destination*  
home.)  
Call Home  
Touch VOICE icon to call your home (Only when the phone number is registered in your  
Setting your home to waypoint  
Destination* Waypoint Home Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (This function is only available if  
you have set the destination.)  
Display the map of surroundings on your home  
Destination* Display Home Display the map of surroundings on your home.  
Display the map of surroundings on your destination  
Destination* Display Destination Display the map of surroundings on your destination.  
Set the map location as your destination  
Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. Basic Operation* Set As Desti-  
nation If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If there is no route, the system starts  
the route calculation.  
Set the map location as your waypoint  
Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. Basic Operation* Set As Way-  
point Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.  
Registering the map location to the address book  
Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. Basic Operation* Registration  
The system register that point and Information edit screen appears.  
Operating the navigation map scale  
Map Operation* Change Scale* XXXX <kilo> meter(s) Scale <25m, 50m, 100m, 200m, 500m, 1km, 2km, 5km,  
10km, 20km, 50km, 100km, 200km, 500km, 1000km, 2000km> Map screen will be changed to selected scale.  
(This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.)  
Map Operation* Change Scale* XXXX mile/yards Scale <0.02miles, 0.05miles, 0.1miles, 0.25miles, 0.5miles,  
0.75miles, 1mile, 2.5miles, 5miles, 10miles, 25miles, 50miles, 100miles, 250miles, 500miles, 1000miles, 25yards,  
50yards, 100yards> Map screen will be changed to selected scale. (This function is not available in vehicle  
dynamics mode.)  
Map Operation* Change Scale* Zoom Out/Zoom In Map screen will zoom out or zoom in.  
Operating the view mode  
Map Operation* Change View Mode* Map View, Driver’s View, Twin Map View, Route View, Guide View, Rear  
View, Vehicle Dynamics Map screen will be changed to selected view mode.  
Operating the map orientation  
Map Operation* Heading Up, North Up Map orientation will be changed.  
Recalculating the route  
Route Options* Change Route* Rerouting, Use Main Road, Avoid Main Road, Use Freeway, Avoid Freeway,  
Use Ferry, Avoid Ferry, Use Toll Road, Avoid Toll Road If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to recalculate.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking the current route  
Route Options* Route Profile Displaying the route profile screen.  
Route Options* Next Guidance You can hear the information of next guidance point.  
Canceling the route  
Route Options* Cancel Route If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel the current route.  
Route Options  
*
Cancel Waypoint  
If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel route until next waypoint.  
Checking the traffic list  
Traffic Information* Traffic Event List Displaying the traffic event list.  
Traffic Information* Traffic On Route List Displaying the traffic event list on your route.  
Traffic Information* Traffic Flow List Displaying the traffic flow list.  
Operating the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology  
Call* Telephone book Displaying the telephone book. (Unavailable while the vehicle is running.)  
Call* Call Registered Point (registered location name) If the registered location has telephone number data,  
touch VOICE icon to call the registered location.  
Call* Redial Touch VOICE icon to redial.  
Call* Call Phone Number Say the number you want to call. Touch VOICE icon to dial.  
Call* Received Call Displaying the received call list.  
Call* Call Favorite 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Touch VOICE icon to dial.  
Erase the tracking  
Other Operation* Erase Tracks Touch VOICE icon to delete the tracking.  
Viewing the Emargency Info screen  
Other Operation* Emergency Information Displaying the Emergency info screen.  
Turning on or off the Overlay POI  
Other Operation* Display Overlay POI Displaying the selected POI in Overlay POI.  
Other Operation* Hide Overlay POI Turn off Overlay POI.  
Voice commands related to AV operation  
Give the following verbal commands after switching the correspond audio source (except for “Com-  
mon AV commands”).  
Common AV commands  
AV Operation* Change Display Navigation Screen Switching to the navigation map or menu screen.  
AV Operation* Change Display AV screen Switching to the Audio source screen.  
AV Operation* Source Off Turning the Audio source off.  
AV Operation* Traffic Channel Recalling the memorized traffic channel for XM or SIRIUS satellite radio tuner.  
AV Operation* Change Source CD, DVD, AM, FM, TV, MCD, AV Input, AUX, SIRIUS, iPod, XM, EXTERNAL 1,  
EXTERNAL 2, Music Library Switching to the desired audio source. (You cannot switch to an unavailable source.)  
Operation for Multi-CD  
AV Operation* Disc 1 to 12 Selecting the disc for playback.  
Operation for FM  
AV Operation* Preset 1 to 6 Switching to that preset station directly.  
AV Operation* Change Band Switching the band.  
Operation for AM  
AV Operation* Preset 1 to 6 Switching to that preset station directly.  
Operation for TV  
AV Operation* Preset 1 to 12 Switching to that preset station directly.  
AV Operation* Change Band Switching the band.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation for XM, SIRIUS tuner  
AV Operation* Preset 1 to 6 Switching to that preset station directly.  
AV Operation* Change Band Switching the band.  
AV Operation* Category Mode Switching to the Category mode.  
AV Operation* All Channel Mode Switching to the All Channel mode.  
AV Operation* Memo Memorizing the title and artist information of that song to MyMix.  
Operation for CD  
AV Operation* Change Media Switching the CD-DA part and CD-ROM (MP3) part.  
Operation for Music Library  
AV Operation* Music Search* Album <Album Playlist name> Playback the selected album playlist.  
AV Operation* Music Search* <Album Playlist name> Playback the selected album playlist. (Note 1)  
AV Operation* Music Search* Artist <Artist Playlist name> Playback the selected artist playlist.  
AV Operation* Music Search* <Artist Playlist name> Playback the selected artist playlist. (Note 1)  
AV Operation* Music Search* Genre <Genre playlist name> Playback the selected genre playlist.  
AV Operation* Music Search* <Genre playlist name> Playback the selected genre playlist. (Note 1)  
AV Operation* Music Search* My Favorites My Favorites 1, My Favorites 2, My Favorites 3, My Favorites 4,  
MyMix Playback selected playlist.  
AV Operation* Music Search* My Favorites 1, My Favorites 2, My Favorites 3, My Favorites 4, MyMix Play-  
back selected playlist.  
AV Operation* Track Search <Track name> Playback the selected track. (Note 2)  
(Note 1):This operation is available only when that group is already selected.  
(Note 2):This operation is available for the playlist currently playing.  
After checking traffic information manually  
If the traffic congestion is found after checking the traffic information manually, “Do you want to  
reroute?” appears on screen. In this time, you can say voice commands to operate.  
Do you want to reroute?  
Options:  
Yes:  
The route will be recalculated by touching VOICE icon.  
No:  
The route will not be recalculated and the map screen of that location appears.  
Location screen (A) and (B)  
Location screen (A)  
The following commands can be vocalized:  
Set As Destination  
If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If there is no route, the system  
starts the route calculation.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Set as Waypoint  
Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.  
Display Map  
Displaying the map of surroundings on that location.  
Call here  
If the location has telephone number data, touch VOICE icon to make a call to the location.  
Location screen (B)  
The following commands can be vocalized:  
Set As Destination  
Same as above.  
Set As Waypoint  
Same as above.  
Display Map  
Same as above.  
Next  
Seeing the next POI.  
Previous  
Seeing the previous POI.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Voice Commands  
The navigation system also can recognize the words in the following list.  
Other voice commands for navigation operation  
Preferential voice command  
Back  
Other voice command  
Return, Previous  
Escape, Skip  
Cancel  
Current Location  
Voice Help  
My Location  
Recognition Help, Help  
Next, Following  
Next Page  
Previous Page  
Basic Operation  
Set As Destination  
Set As Waypoint  
Registration  
Back Page  
Basics, Basic  
Set, Go  
Set Waypoint, Waypoint  
Register, Store  
Destination  
Go To, Search  
POI  
Point Of Interest, Points Of Interest  
Addresses, Address Search  
Surrounding, Around  
Telephone, Phone Number  
Registered Points, My Addresses  
Search History, Destination List  
Vicinity, Search Around  
Go Home, Drive Home  
Waypoint To Home, Registered Home As Waypoint  
Phone Home, Dial Home  
Show Home  
Address  
Area  
Telephone Number  
Address Book  
Destination History  
Vicinity Search  
Return Home  
Waypoint Home  
Call Home  
Display Home  
Display Destination  
Map Operation  
Zoom Out  
Destination Map, Show Destination  
Map, Map Option  
Out, Higher  
Zoom In  
In, Lower  
Change Scale  
Scale, Zoom  
25 meters Scale  
50 meters Scale  
100 meters Scale  
200 meters Scale  
500 meters Scale  
1 kilometer Scale  
2 kilometers Scale  
5 kilometers Scale  
10 kilometers Scale  
20 kilometers Scale  
50 kilometers Scale  
100 kilometers Scale  
200 kilometers Scale  
500 kilometers Scale  
1000 kilometers Scale  
2000 kilometers Scale  
0.02 miles Scale  
0.05 miles Scale  
25meters  
50meters  
100meters  
200meters  
500meters  
1kilometer  
2kilometers  
5kilometers  
10kilometers  
20kilometers  
50kilometers  
100kilometers  
200kilometers  
500kilometers  
1000kilometers  
2000kilometers  
0.02miles  
0.05miles  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preferential voice command  
0.1 miles Scale  
0.25 miles Scale  
0.5 miles Scale  
0.75 miles Scale  
1 mile Scale  
Other voice command  
0.1miles  
0.25miles  
0.5miles  
0.75miles  
1mile  
2.5 miles Scale  
5 miles Scale  
10 miles Scale  
25 miles Scale  
50 miles Scale  
100 miles Scale  
250 miles Scale  
500 miles Scale  
1000 miles Scale  
25 yards Scale  
50 yards Scale  
100 yards Scale  
Change View Mode  
Map View  
2.5miles  
5miles  
10miles  
25miles  
50miles  
100miles  
250miles  
500miles  
1000miles  
25yards  
50yards  
100yards  
View Mode, Change View  
Normal Map, Flat Map  
Driver, 3D  
Driver’s View  
Twin Map View  
Route View  
Twin, Split  
Turns, Turn View  
Guide, Arrow  
Guide View  
Rear View  
Rear, Back View  
Dynamics, Meters  
North, Compass  
Head Up, Car Up  
Change Route Options  
Edit Route  
Vehicle Dynamics  
North Up  
Heading Up  
Route Options  
Change Route  
Rerouting  
New Route, Update Route  
Main Roads, Take Main Roads  
Freeways, Highways  
Ferry, Ferries  
Use Main Road  
Use Freeway  
Use Ferry  
Use Toll Road  
Avoid Freeway  
Avoid Ferry  
Toll Road, Payroad  
Avoid Highway, Avoid Interstate  
Avoid Ferries, Skip Ferries  
Avoid Tolls, Avoid Pay  
Delete Route, Cancel Guidance  
Profile  
Avoid Toll Road  
Cancel Route  
Route Profile  
Cancel Waypoint  
Next Guidance  
Traffic Information  
Traffic Events List  
Traffic On Route List  
Traffic Flow List  
Call  
Delete Waypoint, Take Away Waypoint  
Following Guidance, Guidance After This  
Traffic, View Traffic Info  
Event List, Events  
On Route List, Route List  
Flow List, Flows  
Dial, Ring  
Call Registered Point  
Call Phone Number  
Telephone Book  
Redial  
Call Address Book, Call Registered  
Call By Number, Call Number  
Tel Book, Phone Book  
Call Again, Phone Again  
Call 1, Phone 1  
Call Favorite 1  
Call Favorite 2  
Call 2, Phone 2  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preferential voice command  
Call Favorite 3  
Call Favorite 4  
Call Favorite 5  
Received Call  
Other Operation  
Erase Tracks  
Other voice command  
Call 3, Phone 3  
Call 4, Phone 4  
Call 5, Phone 5  
Received, Who Called  
Other, Others  
Delete Tracks, Remove Tracks  
Show Overlay POI, Display POIs  
Set, Go  
Display Overlay POI  
Set As Destination  
Set As Waypoint  
Yes  
Set Waypoint, Waypoint  
OK, I Agree  
No  
Not OK, I Disagree  
Other voice commands for AV operation  
Preferential voice command  
AV Input  
Other voice command  
Video Input  
MCD  
CD Changer  
Rock/Pop  
Rock, Pop  
Hip-Hop/Rap  
Soul/Urban  
Hip-Hop, Rap  
Soul, Urban  
Category list for visinity search  
If you say the category name (category title), the system search for vicinity POIs in that category  
without taking the chain into consideration.  
Category name: Gas Station  
76, ARCO, BP-AMOCO, CHEVRON, CITGO, CLARK, CONOCO, ESSO, EXXON-MOBIL, FINA, GETTY, GULF, PETRO-  
CANADA, PHILLIPS 66, SHELL, SINCLAIR, SUNOCO, TEXACO, ULTRAMAR, Gas Station-Others  
Category name: Bank & ATM  
B B & T, BANK OF AMERICA, BANK OF MONTREAL, BANK OF NEW YORK, BANK OF NOVA SCOTIA, BANK ONE,  
CHASE MANHATTAN BANK, CIBC BANK, CITIBANK, FIRST UNION NATIONAL BANK, FLEET BANK, HSBC BANK  
USA, KEY BANK, LA SALLE BANK, LAURENTIAN BANK OF CANADA, MELLON BANK, NATIONAL BANK OF CAN-  
ADA, PNC BANK, REGIONS BANK, ROYAL BANK OF CANADA, SOUTHTRUST BANK, SUN TRUST BANK, TOR-  
ONTO DOMINION BANK, UNION BANK OF CALIFORNIA, US BANK, WACHOVIA BANK, WASHINGTON MUTUAL,  
WELLS FARGO BANK, Bank & ATM-Others  
Category name: Restaurant  
American, Asian, Barbecue, Cafe & Espresso, Chinese, Continental, Creole-Cajun, French, Greek, Indian, Italian, Jap-  
anese, Mexican, Pizzeria, Seafood, Steak House, Thai, Restaurant-Others  
Category name: Fast Food Chains  
ARBY'S, AU BON PAIN, BAJA FRESH, BASKIN-ROBBINS, BOSTON MARKET, BRAUM'S ICE CREAM & DAIRY,  
BURGER KING, CARL'S JR., CARVEL ICE CREAM BAKERY, CHURCH'S CHICKEN, COLD STONE CREAMERY, DAIRY  
QUEEN, HAAGEN-DAZS ICE CREAM, HARDEE'S, HARVEY'S, IN-N-OUT BURGER, JACK IN THE BOX, K F C, LONG  
JOHN SILVER'S, MC DONALD'S, PANDA EXPRESS, QUIZNOS, RUBIO'S, SECOND CUP, SONIC, STARBUCK'S COF-  
FEE, SUBWAY SANDWICHES & SALADS, TACO BELL, TACO JOHN'S, TCBY, TIM HORTON'S, TJ CINNAMONS,  
TOGO'S, WENDY'S  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Category name: Restaurant Chains  
A & W FAMILY RESTAURANT, APPLEBEE'S, BENNIGAN'S, BONANZA, CHILI'S GRILL & BAR, CHUCK E CHEESE  
PIZZA, CLAIM JUMPER, COCO'S, DOMINO'S PIZZA, FAZOLI'S, GODFATHER'S PIZZA, GOLDEN CORRAL FAMILY  
STEAK HSE, IHOP RESTAURANT, KELSEY'S, LITTLE CAESARS PIZZA, LONE STAR STEAKHOUSE, MARIE CAL-  
LENDER, OUTBACK STEAKHOUSE, PAPA JOHN'S PIZZA, PASTA CONNECTION, PERKINS FAMILY RESTAURANT,  
PIZZA HUT, PONDEROSA STEAK HOUSE, RED LOBSTER, ROUND TABLE PIZZA, RUBY TUESDAY, SHAKEY'S  
PIZZA, SIZZLER, SWISS CHALET, TGI FRIDAY'S  
Category name: Supermarkets  
ACME, ALBERTSONS, ALDI, ATLANTIC & PACIFIC TEA CO, BI-LO, CUB FOODS, FOOD LION, GIANT, GIANT EAGLE,  
H-E-B, HY-VEE, IGA, JEWEL, KROGER, MEIJER, PANTRY, PATHMARK, PIGGLY WIGGLY, PUBLIX, RALEY'S, RALPH'S,  
SAFEWAY, SAVE-A-LOT, SHAW'S SUPERMARKET, STOP & SHOP, STOP N GO, TOPS FRIENDLY MARKET, VON'S,  
WHOLE FOODS, WINN-DIXIE, Supermarkets-Others  
Category name: Automotive  
AAA, RV Facility, Automobile Club, Parking, Car Parts & Accessories, Car Repair Facility, Car Wash  
Category name: Retailer Chains  
BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY, COSTCO, FACTOR 2-U, KMART, KOHL'S, ROSS, SAM'S CLUB, STEIN MART, T J  
MAXX, TARGET STORES, WAL-MART, Retailer Chains-Others  
Category name: Hotel  
AMERI HOST INN, BAYMONT INN & SUITES, BEST WESTERN, COURTYARD BY MARRIOTT, DAYS INN, DOUBLE  
TREE, ECONO LODGE, EMBASSY SUITES, FAIRFIELD INN, HAMPTON INN, HILTON, HILTON GARDEN INN, HOLI-  
DAY INN, HOMEWOOD SUITES, HOWARD JOHNSON, HYATT, KNIGHTS INN, LA QUINTA INN, MARRIOTT, MOTEL  
6, QUALITY-COMFORT-CLARION, RAMADA INN, RED ROOF INN, RESIDENCE INNS, SCOTTISH INN, SHERATON,  
STUDIO 6, SUPER 8, TRAVELODGE, WINGATE INN, Hotel-Others  
Category name: Car Dealer  
ACURA, AUDI, BMW, BUICK, CADILLAC, CHEVROLET, CHRYSLER, DAEWOO, DODGE, FORD, HONDA, HYUNDAI,  
INFINITI, ISUZU, JAGUAR, JEEP, KIA, LAND ROVER, LEXUS, LINCOLN, MAZDA, MERCEDES-BENZ, MITSUBISHI,  
NISSAN, OLDSMOBILE, PONTIAC, PORSCHE, SAAB, SATURN, SUBARU, SUZUKI, TOYOTA, VOLKSWAGEN,  
VOLVO, Car Dealer-Others  
Category name: Rental and Other Services  
Rental Car, Video Rental, Laundromat, Dry Cleaners  
Category name: Electronics Retailer  
BEST BUY, CIRCUIT CITY, FRY'S ELECTRONICS, GOOD GUYS, RADIO SHACK, ULTIMATE ELECTRONICS, Electronics  
Retailer-Others  
Category name: Groceries  
Liquor Store, Bakery, Butcher, Convenience Store, Delicatessen, Groceries-Others  
Category name: Shopping  
Shopping Center, Beauty & Barber, Book Store, Music Store, Fashion, Florist, Furniture, Home Improvement, Glass-  
ware, House & Office, Optometrist, Shoes & Bags, Sporting Goods, Toys, Cellular Phone Shop, Shopping-Others  
Category name: Entertainment  
Stadium & Arena, Brewery, Casino, Cinema, Night Club, Theater & Play, Winery, Pub  
Category name: Leisure  
Museum, Art Gallery, Zoo, Amusement Park, Fair Ground, Beach, National Park & Forest, Camping & Hiking, Ski  
Resort, Bowling, Golf Course, Gym, Pool & Tennis, Travel Agency, Tourist Information, Tourist Attraction, Park & Rec-  
reation  
Category name: Public Service & Facility  
Police Station, Government Office, Post Office, Court House, Convention Center, City Center, Library  
Category name: Transportation  
Airline Access, Airport, Ferry Terminal, Train Station, Rest Area  
Category name: Medical  
Doctor, Dentist, Veterinarian, Emergency Medical Service, Hospital, Pharmacy  
Category name: School  
University & College, Nursery School, Elementary School, Junior High School, High School, Vocational School  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Returning the Navigation System to the Default or Factory Settings  
You can return settings or recorded contents to the default or factory settings. There are four methods  
to clear user data, and the situations and the cleared content are different for each method. For the  
content to be cleared in each methods, see the list presented later.  
The map data and the system data are not cleared from the hard disk drive by any clearing method.  
Method 1: RESET button  
Pressing the RESET button clears almost all settings of the audio function.  
The system becomes the same state when the battery of the vehicle is removed or the yellow lead of  
the navigation system is disconnected.  
Method 2: [Restore Factory Settings]  
Clears some items in the [Map] menu and in the [Settings] menu.  
[Restore Factory Settings] Page 176  
Method 3: [Reset] on start-up  
Clears the setting values stored in the hard disk drive.  
“If system errors frequently occur” Page 177  
Method 4: [Clear user information from hard disk] on start-up  
Clears all user data (including Music Library) stored in the hard disk drive.  
“Returning the navigation system completely to the initial state” Page 177  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Setting items to be deleted  
The items to be deleted vary depending on the reset method. The items listed in the following table  
return to the default or factory settings. The items not listed below will be retained.  
However, if you carry out [Clear user information from hard disk] all the settings related to the  
navigation function including the item not listed below are deleted.  
— : The setting will be retained.  
: The setting content will be cleared and returns to the default or factory settings.  
1
1
Method 1 Method 2 Method 3  
Method 4  
Navigation functions  
Map function View mode and scale setting on the  
map  
Direction of the map  
Last cursor position on the map screen  
Route Setting Current route  
Guidance state of the current route  
Vehicle position information  
Route conditions  
Destination  
menu  
Auto full-in function for cities and  
streets  
Point registered in Address Book  
Sorting order selected in Address  
Book  
Information  
menu  
Sorting order selected in Traffic  
Events, Traffic On Route, and Traffic  
Flow  
Traffic Settings  
Phone Settings (Phone Menu)  
Telephone Book, Dial Favorite,  
Dialed Numbers, Received Calls  
(Phone Menu)  
Stock Info  
My Favorites  
Emergency Info  
Map menu  
Short-Cut Selection, View Mode  
Displayed Info, Overlay POI, Day/  
Night Display, AV Guide Mode,  
Road Color  
Settings  
menu  
Language (Regional settings), Time  
(Regional settings), Installation  
Angle Setup (Hardware), Defined  
Locations, Modify Current Location,  
Background Picture Setting  
Items other than above  
[Learning Status] ([Hardware]),  
[3D Calibration Status] ([Hardware])  
Vehicle  
Dynamics  
Right and left gauge type, Adjust Look  
Audio Set-  
tings  
All items  
System Set- Mute Set  
tings  
Clock DISP  
REC Mode  
Other item  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
1
Method 1 Method 2 Method 3  
Method 4  
Audio functions  
Music Library Repeat, Random, Scan, and Pause set-  
(LIBRARY)  
tings  
Track data  
Play list  
Last playback position  
Alert on/off for My Mix  
Preset memory  
Preset memory  
Preset memory  
Rear Screen setting  
XM  
FM  
AM  
TV  
REAR  
SCREEN  
Others  
Picture Adjust  
Display Angle  
If system errors frequently occur Returning the navigation system  
completely to the initial state  
to the navigation system turns off, an inappropri-  
If system errors frequently occur and the power  
To return the entire navigation system to the  
ate content may have been recorded in the mem-  
default or factory settings, initialize the naviga-  
ory or the hard disk drive. In such a case, the  
tion system in the following order:  
normal operation may be restored by clearing the  
1. Press the RESET button on the hard-  
ware.  
setting values stored in the hard disk drive. For  
the contents to be cleared, see the list presented  
later.  
2. Initialize the user data area on the hard  
disk drive.  
Chart for data deleted Page 176  
3. Clear the learned data in the sensor.  
1 Start the engine.  
1 Turn the ignition switch off.  
After a little time, the start-up screen comes  
on for a few seconds.  
2 Press the RESET button.  
2 Touch and hold the MAP button while the  
start-up screen is displayed.  
3 Start the engine.  
After a little time, the start-up screen comes  
on for a few seconds.  
The Clear memory screen appears.  
3 Touch [Reset].  
4 Touch and hold the MAP button while the  
start-up screen is displayed.  
4 Touch [Yes].  
The Clear memory screen appears.  
The setting values stored in the hard disk drive  
return to the default or factory settings. After  
that, the navigation opening screen appears.  
5 Touch [Clear user information from hard  
disk].  
This reset operation clears all music data  
recorded in the music library. Note that the  
cleared data cannot be restored.  
6 Touch [Yes].  
The user area in the hard disk drive is initial-  
ized. After that, the navigation system restarts.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7 Press the MENU button and then touch  
[Settings].  
Adjusting the Response Posi-  
tions of the Touch Panels  
(Touch Panel Calibration)  
The setting menu appears.  
8 Touch [Hardware] and then touch [3D  
Calibration Status].  
If you feel that the touch keys on the screen devi-  
ate from the actual positions that respond to your  
touch, adjust the response positions of the touch  
panel. There are two adjustment methods: 4-point  
adjustment, in which you touch four corners of  
the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which  
you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen.  
9 Touch [Learning Status] and then touch  
[Reset All].  
Make sure to use the supplied stylus for  
adjustment, and gently touch the screen. If  
you press the touch panel forcefully, the touch  
panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp  
pointed tool such as a ballpoint pen or a  
mechanical pen. Otherwise the screen is  
damaged.  
Stylus (supplied with navigation system)  
1 Press the V button.  
The Picture Adjust screen appears.  
2 Press and hold the V button for two sec-  
onds or more.  
The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen  
appears.  
3 Touch and hold each of the arrows on the  
four corners of the screen with the touch  
panel adjustment pen.  
Hold the pen on the arrow until each one of  
the four arrows turns red.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Press the V button.  
Positioning Technology  
The adjusted position data is saved.  
Do not turn off the engine while saving the  
adjusted position data.  
The navigation system accurately measures your  
current location by combining the positioning by  
GPS and by Dead Reckoning.  
Press the MAP button to complete the 4-  
point adjustment.  
Positioning by GPS  
5 Press the V button.  
The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen  
appears.  
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a net-  
work of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each of the  
satellites, which orbit at a height of 68 900 000  
feet (21 000 km), continually broadcasts radio sig-  
nals giving time and position information. This  
ensures that signals from at least three can be  
picked up from any open area on the ground’s  
surface.  
6 Gently touch the center of the + mark dis-  
played on the screen with the touch panel  
adjustment pen.  
After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-  
tion data is saved.  
Do not turn off the engine while saving the  
adjusted position data.  
The accuracy of the GPS information depends on  
how good the reception is. When the signals are  
strong and reception is good, GPS can determine  
latitude, longitude, and altitude for accurate posi-  
tioning in three dimensions. But if signal quality  
is poor, only two dimensions, latitude and longi-  
tude, can be obtained and positioning errors are  
somewhat greater.  
Press the V button to return to the previ-  
ous adjustment position.  
To cancel the adjustment, press the MAP  
button.  
7 Press the MAP button.  
The adjustment is complete.  
If touch panel adjustment cannot be per-  
formed properly, consult your local Pio-  
neer dealer.  
Positioning by dead reckoning  
The 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation system  
also calculates your position. The current loca-  
tion is measured by detecting driving distance  
with the speed pulse, the turning direction with  
the Gyrosensor, and inclination of the road with  
the G sensor.  
The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculate  
changes of altitude, and corrects for discrepan-  
cies in the distance traveled caused by driving  
along winding roads or up slopes. Also, the navi-  
gation system learns the driving conditions and  
stores information in the memory; thus, as you  
drive more, the precision of the positioning  
becomes more accurate.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
If you use chains on your wheels for winter  
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors may  
suddenly increase because of difference in  
wheel diameter. The system detects the fact  
that the tire diameter has changed, and auto-  
matically replaces the value for calculating  
distance.  
The method of positioning changes as follows  
depending on whether the speed pulse of your  
vehicle is detected or not:  
3D hybrid mode  
This is active when the speed pulse is detected.  
Inclination of a street can be detected.  
If the ND-PG1 is used or if your vehicle is oper-  
ating in Simple hybrid mode, the distance cal-  
culation value cannot be replaced  
automatically.  
Simple hybrid mode  
When the speed pulse is not detected, position-  
ing is performed in this mode. Only horizontal  
movement is detected, so it becomes less accu-  
rate. Also, when the positioning by GPS is not  
available, such as when your vehicle enters a  
long tunnel, the discrepancy between your actual  
and calculated position may become bigger.  
Map matching  
As mentioned, the GPS and dead reckoning sys-  
tems used by this navigation system are suscepti-  
ble to certain errors. Their calculations may, on  
occasion, place you in a location on the map  
where no road exists. In this situation, the pro-  
cessing system understands that vehicles travel  
only on roads, and can correct your position by  
adjusting it to a nearby road. This is called map  
matching.  
The speed pulse data comes from the speed  
sensing circuit. The location of this speed  
sensing circuit depends on your vehicle  
model. In some cases, it is impossible to  
make a connection to it, and in such a case  
we recommend that the ND-PG1 speed pulse  
generator (sold separately) be used.  
How do GPS and dead reckon-  
ing work together?  
For maximum accuracy, your navigation system  
continually compares GPS data with your esti-  
mated position as calculated from the data of 3D  
Hybrid Sensor. However, if only the data from the  
3D Hybrid Sensor is available for a long period,  
positioning errors are gradually compounded  
until the estimated position becomes unreliable.  
For this reason, whenever GPS signals are avail-  
able, they are matched with the data of the 3D  
Hybrid Sensor and used to correct it for improved  
accuracy.  
With map matching  
To ensure maximum accuracy, the dead reckon-  
ing system learns with experience. By comparing  
the position it estimates with your actual position  
as obtained using GPS, it can correct for various  
types of error, such as tire wear and the rolling  
motion of your vehicle. As you drive, the dead  
reckoning system gradually gathers more data,  
learns more, and the accuracy of its estimates  
gradually increases. So, after you have driven  
some distance, you can expect your position as  
shown on the map to show fewer errors.  
Without map matching  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• If a car phone or cellular phone is used near  
the GPS antenna, GPS reception may be lost  
temporarily.  
Handling Large Errors  
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by com-  
bining GPS, Dead Reckoning, and map match-  
ing. However, in some situations, these functions  
may not work properly, and the error may become  
bigger.  
• Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray paint  
or car wax, because this may block the recep-  
tion of GPS signals. Snow buildup can also  
degrade the signals, so keep the antenna  
clear.  
If, for any reason, GPS signals cannot be  
received, learning and error correction are not  
possible. If GPS positioning has been operat-  
ing for only a short time, your vehicle’s actual  
position and the current location mark on the  
map may diverge considerably. Once GPS  
reception is restored, accuracy will be recov-  
ered.  
When the positioning by GPS is  
impossible  
• If signals cannot be received from more than  
two GPS satellites, GPS positioning does not  
take place.  
• In some driving conditions, signals from GPS  
satellites may not reach your vehicle. In this  
case, it is impossible for the system to use GPS  
positioning.  
Vehicles that Cannot Obtain  
Speed Pulse Data  
The speed pulse data comes from the speed  
sensing circuit. The location of this speed  
sensing circuit depends on your vehicle  
model. In some cases, it is impossible to  
make a connection to it, and in such a case  
we recommend that the ND-PG1 speed pulse  
generator (sold separately) be used.  
In tunnels or enclosed parking garages  
Conditions Likely to Cause  
Noticeable Positioning Errors  
For various reasons such as the state of the road  
you are traveling on and the state of reception of  
the GPS signal, the actual position of your vehicle  
may differ from the position displayed on the map  
screen.  
Under elevated roads or similar structures  
• If you make a shallow turn.  
When driving among high buildings  
When driving through a dense forest or tall trees  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• If there is a parallel road.  
• If there is a loop or similar road configuration.  
• If you take a ferry.  
• If there is another road very nearby, such as in  
the case of an elevated freeway.  
• If you are driving on a long, straight road or a  
gently curving road.  
• If you take a recently opened road that is not on  
the map.  
• If you are on a steep mountain road with many  
height changes.  
• If you drive in zig-zags.  
• If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot or  
similar using a spiral ramp.  
• If the road has connected hairpin bends.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or simi-  
lar structure.  
• If you join the road after driving around a large  
parking lot.  
• When you pass around a traffic circle.  
• If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a  
gravel road or in snow.  
• When starting driving immediately after start-  
ing the engine.  
• If you turn your navigation system on while  
driving.  
• If you put on chains, or change your tires for  
ones with a different size.  
Some types of vehicles may not output a speed  
signal while driving at just a few kilometers per  
hour. In such a case, the current location of your  
vehicle may not be displayed correctly while in a  
traffic congestion or in a parking lot.  
• If trees or other obstacles block the GPS sig-  
nals for a considerable period.  
• If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-stop  
manner, as in a traffic congestion.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common prob-  
lems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehensive, it  
should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be found here, con-  
tact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.  
Problems in the screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (See)  
Power doesn’t turn on. The naviga-  
tion system doesn’t operate.  
Leads and connectors are incorrectly Confirm once more that all connec-  
connected.  
tions are correct.  
The fuse is blown.  
Rectify the reason for the fuse blow-  
ing, then replace the fuse. Be very  
sure to install a correct fuse with the  
same rate.  
Noise and other factors are causing Refer to “Returning the Navigation  
the internal memory to operate incor- System to the Default or Factory Set-  
rectly.  
tings” and carry out appropriate  
The hard disk drive can not work  
because the temperature is  
extremely low or high.  
Wait until the temperature inside the  
vehicle falls or rises.  
When the ignition switch is turned  
ON (or turned to ACC), the motor  
sounds.  
This system confirms whether a disc This is a normal operation.  
is loaded or not.  
The navigation does not boot up.  
The power cable is not wired cor-  
rectly.  
Turn the system off and the check  
the wiring.  
The hard disk drive cannot run Wait until the inside of the vehicle  
because the temperature is too low. warms up.  
The hard disk drive is defective.  
Consult your authorised Pioneer  
dealer.  
You cannot position your vehicle on  
the map or the positioning error is  
large.  
The quality of signals from the GPS  
satellites is poor, causing reduced  
positioning accuracy. Such a loss of antenna if necessary, or continue  
signal quality may happen for the fol- driving until reception improves.  
Check the GPS signal reception (➞  
Page 93) and the position of the GPS  
lowing reasons:  
Keep the antenna clear.  
• The GPS antenna is in an unsuit-  
able location.  
• Obstacles are blocking signals  
from the satellites.  
• The position of satellites relative to  
your vehicle is bad.  
• Signals from the GPS satellites  
have been modified to reduce  
accuracy. (GPS satellites are oper-  
ated by the US Department of  
Defense, and the US government  
reserves the right to distort posi-  
tioning data for military reasons.  
This may lead to greater position-  
ing errors.)  
• If a vehicle phone or cellular phone  
is used near the GPS antenna, GPS  
reception may be lost temporarily.  
• Do not cover the GPS antenna with  
spray paint or vehicle wax, because  
this may block the reception of  
GPS signals. Snow buildup can  
also degrade the signals.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (See)  
Signals from the vehicle’s speed  
pulse are not being picked up prop-  
erly.  
Check that the cables are properly  
connected. If necessary, consult the  
dealer that installed the system.  
The navigation system may not be  
mounted securely in your vehicle.  
Check that the navigation system is  
securely mounted and, if necessary,  
consult the dealer that installed the  
system.  
Your vehicle is operating in Simple  
hybrid mode.  
Connect the speed signal input (pink  
lead wire) of the power cable cor-  
rectly, and reset the 3D Hybrid Sen-  
sor memory ([Learning Status]).  
The navigation system is installed  
Confirm the installation angle. (The  
with an extreme angle exceeding the navigation system must be installed  
limitation of the installation angle.  
within the allowed installation angle.  
For details, refer to “Installation Man-  
ual” and [Installation Angle Setup]  
on page 94.)  
Indication of the position of your vehi- Check whether or not the reverse  
cle is misaligned after a U-turn or  
reversing.  
gear signal input lead (purple) is con-  
nected properly. (The navigation sys-  
tem works properly without the lead  
connected, but positioning accuracy  
will be adversely affected.)  
The map continually reorients itself.  
The traveling direction is always set  
to Heading Up.  
Touch  
the map display.  
on the screen and change  
The daylight display is used even  
when the vehicle lights are on.  
[Daytime] is selected to [Day/Night Check the [Day/Night Display] set-  
Display].  
[Automatic] is selected.  
The orange/white lead is not con-  
nected.  
Check the connection.  
The display is very dim.  
The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and Read about the [Day/Night Dis-  
[Nighttime] is selected on [Day/  
Night Display].  
play] setting (Page 49) and, if  
desired, select [Daytime].  
The vehicle cabin temperature is  
extremely low.  
A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is  
used, and such displays tend to  
darken when cold. Wait for the vehi-  
cle to warm up.  
Picture quality adjustment of the dis- Refer to “Operating the Picture  
play is not correct.  
Adjustment” (Page 158) to adjust  
the picture quality.  
Display tilt is not proper setting.  
Press and hold EJECT button to  
adjust the tilt.  
No sounds are heard.  
The volume level will not rise.  
The volume level is low.  
Adjust the volume level.  
Turn the attenuator or mute off.  
Check the connection.  
The attenuator or mute is on.  
The speaker lead is disconnected.  
Volume of beeps and navigation  
guidance cannot be adjusted.  
You cannot adjust these parameters Turn the volume up or down with  
with the VOL (/) button.  
[Volume] in the [Settings] menu.  
Adjusting the volume of navigation  
guidance and beep is not possible.  
You cannot adjust them with the  
VOL (/) button.  
Turn the volume up or down accord-  
ing to [Volume] (Page 91) in the  
Settings menu.  
A strange sound is heard when the  
vehicle comes close to a certain  
place. (E.g. Dog barking)  
The sound for the registered location Set the sound of that registered loca-  
is set.  
tion to [No Sound]. (Page 64)  
Slope is not displayed on the Vehi- The speed pulse lead is not con-  
Connect the speed pulse lead.  
cle Dynamics screen. Inclination  
does not move on the 3D Calibra-  
tion screen.  
nected.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (See)  
No sound, no voice.  
“Guide Mute” has been set, or sound Adjust the volume of the guidance or  
volume is reduced to 0.  
turn “Guide Mute” off.  
Refer to “Setting the volume Related  
to the Guidance and Phone” (➞  
Page 91).  
When the screen is frozen...  
Park your vehicle at a safe place, and cut off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc off”. Then  
start the engine again, and turn the power to the navigation system back on. If this does not solve the  
problem, press the RESET button on the navigation system.  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (See)  
CD or DVD playback is not possible. The disc is inserted upside down.  
The disc is dirty.  
Insert the disc with the label upward.  
Clean disc.  
The disc is cracked or otherwise  
damaged.  
Insert a normal, round disc.  
The files on the CD are an irregular  
file format.  
Check the file format. (Refer to  
[Handing and care of the disc] on the  
Hardware Manual.)  
The CD format cannot be played  
back.  
Replace disc. (Refer to [Handing and  
care of the disc] on the Hardware  
Manual.)  
The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type the disc is. ( ➞  
cannot play.  
Hardware Manual)  
No picture.  
The parking brake lead is not con-  
nected or applied.  
Connect a parking brake lead cor-  
rectly, and apply the parking brake.  
Parking brake interlock is activated.  
Park your vehicle in the safe place  
and apply the parking brake.  
Parking brake interlock ➞  
[AV Input] setting is incorrect.  
Please read the following page and  
set the setting correctly.  
Audio skipping.  
The navigation system is not firmly  
secured.  
Secure the navigation system firmly.  
Failure hard disk drive.  
Consult your Pioneer dealer.  
“Rear display” picture disappears.  
The setting for [REAR SCREEN] is  
incorrect.  
Please read the following page and  
set the rear screen setting correctly.  
There was a problem with the “Rear  
display” or a faulty wiring connec-  
tion, for example.  
Check the “Rear display” and its con-  
nection.  
When the shift lever is in [R], displays Select [DVD] or [AV] in REAR  
rear view camera images. (When  
[MIRROR] is selected in REAR  
SCREEN menu.)  
SCREEN menu. When you move the  
shift lever other than [R] position, the  
screen will be returned to the previ-  
ous display.  
[DVD-V Setup] is carried out  
You can not display the video image  
to “Rear display” during [DVD-V  
Setup] menu.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (See)  
Nothing is displayed and the touch  
panel keys cannot use.  
The setting for the rear view camera Connect a rear view camera cor-  
is incorrect.  
rectly.  
The shift lever was placed in [R]  
when the rear view camera was not  
connected.  
Press the AV button to return to the  
source display and then select the  
correct polarity setting for Camera  
Input.  
About Camera Input setting ➞  
The back light of the LCD panel is  
turned off.  
Press the V button to turn on the  
back light.  
Touch panel key is not respond or dif- Touch keys deviate from the actual  
Perform the touch panel calibration.  
ferent key is respond.  
positions that respond to your touch “Adjusting the Response Positions of  
for some reason.  
the Touch Panels (Touch Panel Cali-  
CD recording is not possible.  
The disc cannot record, such as MP3 The disc other than normal music CD  
disc, DVD-video, is inserted. can not be recorded.  
Music Library recording will be can- Wait until the current track is ended  
CD recording doesn’t stop though  
the record progress indicator shows celed after playback of the current  
or change the source manually.  
100%.  
track is finished. (The recording  
mode stops at the interval of the  
tracks.)  
“NO SIGNAL” is displayed at the right While waiting for a response from  
Wait for a while and try the operation  
again.  
corner on the map.  
the XM tuner.  
You are in an area that cannot  
receive XM tuner reception.  
Move into an area that can receive  
XM tuner reception.  
Your current location provides very  
poor reception.  
Change your location.  
“UPDATING” is displayed at the right Service subscription is either  
Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of  
receiving both XM audio and XM  
NavTraffic service, if you are sub-  
scribed to only one or the other, the  
system checks to see if you have  
added another service to your  
corner on the map.  
XM audio only or XM NavTraffic  
stand alone.  
account since you last powered on  
the navigation system. When you  
subscribe to both services, this mes-  
sage will stop appearing when you  
turn the ignition ON (ACC ON).  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages and How to React to Them  
Messages for navigation functions  
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system.  
There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a  
case, follow the instructions given on the display.  
Message  
When  
What to do  
Irregular speed pulse signal  
detected. Please power off the sys-  
tem and check the installation. Then,  
please re-boot the system and press  
“OK”.  
If the navigation system does not  
receive the vehicle speed pulse.  
Consult your Pioneer dealer.  
Speed pulse not connected. Calibra- The speed signal input (pink lead  
tion will start without speed pulse. wire) of the power cable is not con-  
Accuracy is not fully ensured without nected.  
speed pulse.  
To operate with 3D hybrid mode, con-  
nect the speed signal input (pink  
lead wire) of the power cable cor-  
rectly.  
Although it can be operated with  
Simple hybrid mode without con-  
necting the speed signal input, the  
precision of the positioning will be  
less accurate.  
Vibration detected. Please power off The navigation unit is installed in a  
Re-install the navigation unit in a  
place where the unit will not be  
affected by vibration.  
the system and check the installa-  
place where it may be affected by a  
tion. Then, please re-boot the system large vibration.  
and press “OK”.  
Direction of G sensor is not correct.  
Please power off the system and  
check the installation. Then, please  
re-boot the system and press “OK”.  
Direction of G sensor is set incor-  
rectly.  
See the Installation Manual and set  
the direction of the navigation unit  
correctly.  
Gyro Sensor is not working properly. Abnormal output of Gyrosensor is  
Please consult your dealer or Pioneer detected.  
service center.  
Note down the error code shown on  
the screen; turn off the power, and  
then contact your nearest Pioneer  
service facility.  
Positioning is not possible due to the The location display is not possible  
hardware. Please contact your dealer due to failure of hardware.  
or Pioneer service center.  
Consult your dealer.  
GPS antenna problem detected.  
The location display is not possible  
Consult your dealer.  
Please contact your dealer or Pioneer due to failure of GPS antenna.  
service center.  
This function is not available now.  
The screen cannot be displayed with If the sensor learning status reaches  
Vehicle Dynamics Display.  
Because the sensor has not been  
taught so the sensor information  
cannot be acquired.  
the Sensor Initializing status or more,  
the system is ready to be used.  
The vertical installation angle is  
changed. Gyro Sensor calibration is  
re-initialized.  
If the mounting angle of the Hide-  
away unit has been changed.  
The system initializes the sensor in  
order to operate it with the maximum  
performance and automatically  
starts re-learning.  
Excess vertical installation angle  
detected. Please install the naviga-  
tion unit correctly.  
The navigation system is installed  
with an extreme angle exceeding the navigation system must be installed  
limitation of the installation angle.  
Confirm the installation angle. (The  
within the allowed installation angle.  
For details, refer to Installation Man-  
ual.)  
No data available at this time.  
If no data is available that can be  
used with the XM tuner.  
Wait for a while and try the operation  
again.  
“UPDATING” is displayed at the right Radio is being updated with the lat-  
Wait until the encryption code is fully  
updated.  
corner on the map  
est encryption code.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Message  
When  
What to do  
UPDATING (Updating)  
The selected channel is not included Select another channel.  
in your subscription.  
Radio is being updated with the lat-  
est encryption code.  
Wait until the encryption code is fully  
updated.  
Route calculation was not possible.  
Route calculation has failed because • Change the destination.  
of malfunction of map data, software, • Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if  
hardware.  
this message persists.  
Route calculation was not possible  
because the destination is too far.  
If the destination is too far.  
• Set a destination closer to the start-  
ing point.  
• Set one or more waypoints.  
Route calculation was not possible  
because the destination is too near.  
The destination or waypoint(s) are  
too close.  
Set a destination [and waypoint(s)]  
farther from the starting point.  
Route calculation was not possible  
due to traffic regulations.  
• The destination or waypoint(s) are  
in a Control Traffic Zone (CTR) and  
the route calculation is hampered.  
• Your vehicle is currently in a Con-  
trol Traffic Zone (CTR) and the  
• Set a destination and waypoint(s)  
outside the CTR if you know where  
the restricted area is.  
• Try the destination or waypoint(s)  
away from the currently set points  
to some extent.  
route calculation is hampered.  
• Drive your vehicle to an unre-  
stricted area and reset the destina-  
tion and waypoint(s).  
Route calculation was not possible  
because no guidance can be pro-  
vided around the destination or the  
starting point.  
The destination, waypoint(s), or start- • Set a destination and waypoint(s)  
ing point are in an area where no on roads.  
road exists (e.g. a mountain) and the • Reset the destination after you  
route calculation is impossible. drive the vehicle to any road.  
Route to destination cannot be cal-  
culated.  
The destination or waypoint(s) are in Change the destination.  
an isolated island, etc. without a ferry  
and the route calculation is impossi-  
ble. If there is no road connect to  
your starting point or destination,  
this message will appear.  
• Ferry could not be avoided.  
• Toll road could not be avoided.  
• Freeways could not be avoided.  
• Toll roads, ferries and freeways  
could not be avoided.  
In case a ferry route, toll roads or  
freeways are included in the route to destination or waypoints that do not  
the destination or waypoints even  
though a route is set to avoid them.  
You can recognize these condition by  
If the current route is not desired, set  
pass through a ferry route, toll roads  
or freeways.  
• Toll roads and ferries could not be icon.  
avoided.  
• Toll roads and freeways could not  
be avoided.  
• Ferries and freeways could not be  
avoided.  
The address does not exist.  
Do you want to continue?  
If the house number entered does  
not exist in the database for the spec- Or, proceed to the next step without  
Re-enter the existing house number.  
ified street.  
entering the house number and set  
the main point of that street as your  
destination.  
This area does not contain any POI’s Facilities of the selected category do Use another search method or move  
of the selected type.  
not exist in the surrounding areas.  
to another location and perform the  
[Vicinity Search] again.  
Failed to make the route profile.  
In rarely case the route calculation  
error may occur.  
• Retry.  
• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if  
this message persists.  
There is no Traffic List.  
There is no available traffic informa- Move to the location where you can  
tion now.  
receive the XM NavTraffic informa-  
tion, and then try the operation  
again.  
There is no /Pictures/ folder.  
Please create /Pictures/ folder and  
store JPEG files in that Folder.  
Cannot load the image because the  
Pictures folder is not found in the  
inserted disc.  
Use the appropriate data after read-  
ing “Limitations for import the pic-  
ture” on page 97.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
When  
What to do  
Data read error.  
Failed to read the data because the  
CD-R is damaged or dirty. Or, the  
Try re-reading the data by inserting a  
clean CD-R.  
pick-up lens of the DVD drive is dirty. Clean the pick-up lens with a com-  
mercially available cleaning kit for  
DVD, then try to reading again.  
The Pictures folder exists on the CD- Use the appropriate data after read-  
R but no data in JPEG format exists. ing “Limitations for import the pic-  
ture” on page 97.  
JPEG file is corrupt.  
The data is damaged or an attempt  
Use the appropriate data after read-  
was made to set a JPEG image, that ing “Limitations for import the pic-  
is out of specifications, as the back-  
ground picture.  
ture” on page 97.  
CAUTION!  
Parking brake lead is incorrectly con- Confirm once more that their con-  
nected. nections are correct.  
System detected improper connec-  
tion of Parking Brake lead.  
Please check your configuration for  
safety. Please see Operation Manual  
for more information regarding safe  
operation.  
Connection failed.  
• The mobile phone’s Bluetooth wire- • Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth  
less technology is turned off .  
• The mobile phone is pared (con-  
nected) with another device.  
wireless technology on.  
• Cancel the paring (connection) and  
retry.  
• Rejection by the mobile phone has • Operate target phone and accept  
received.  
the connection request from the  
navigation system. (Furthermore,  
check the setting related connec-  
tion on your mobile phone.)  
• Check whether your mobile phone  
is turned off or not, whether the dis-  
tance to your mobile phone is too  
far or not.  
• The target mobile phone can not be  
found.  
• Registration step has been suc-  
cessful but connection is fail for  
some reason.  
• Retry the registration and if a con-  
nection still cannot be established,  
try connecting using your mobile  
phone.  
Registration failed.  
• The mobile phone’s Bluetooth wire- • Keep turning the target phone’s  
less technology is turned off during  
the registration step.  
Bluetooth wireless technology on  
during the registration.  
• Rejection by the mobile phone has • Operate target phone and accept  
received.  
• Registration step is fail for some  
reason.  
the registration request from the  
navigation system. (Furthermore,  
check the setting related connec-  
tion on your mobile phone.  
• Retry the registration and if a regis-  
tration still cannot be failed, try reg-  
istering using your mobile phone.  
Automatic connection in progress.  
Please try again later  
If you try to perform another opera-  
tion during automatic connection by • Establish that connection tempo-  
• Wait for a while and retry.  
the system.  
rarily and retry that later.  
Automatic connection in progress.  
Please try manually later  
If you try to connect another phone  
during automatic connection by the rarily and retry that later.  
system.  
Establish that connection tempo-  
Could not find any available phone.  
No available phone is exist on the  
surroundings when the system  
search the mobile phone featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology for  
registration.  
• Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth  
wireless technology on.  
• Check whether your mobile phone  
is turned off or not, whether the dis-  
tance to your mobile phone is too  
far or not.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
When  
What to do  
Bluetooth unit error. It is not possible If the Bluetooth unit is disconnected • Check the connection and retry.  
to find any cell phones.  
from this navigation system or Blue- • Establish that connection tempo-  
tooth unit carry out another process-  
ing when the system search the  
mobile phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology for registration.  
rarily and retry that later.  
Bluetooth unit error. The device  
name could not be set.  
If the Bluetooth unit is disconnected • Check the connection and retry.  
from this navigation system or Blue- • Establish that connection tempo-  
tooth unit carry out another process-  
ing when you change the device  
name.  
rarily and retry that later.  
Registration is not available.  
Reading failed.  
If you try to perform another opera-  
tion immediately after failure the con-  
nection.  
Wait for a while and retry.  
• If you transferred the data from  
your mobile phone by a format can  
• Select just a suitable item, format  
and then retry.  
not be received with navigation sys- • Connect your mobile phone again  
tem.  
• Disconnection has been made dur-  
ing transfer for some reason.  
and retry.  
Calibration failed.  
Please refer to the owner’s manual.  
The touch panel calibration has not  
been carried out with appropriate  
steps.  
Please read the instruction of touch  
panel calibration and retry.  
The HDD is not connected.  
Cannot use HDD.  
Failure of the built-in hard disk drive Consult your dealer.  
occur, such as internal electrical  
problem or file system error, etc.  
Failure of the built-in hard disk drive Consult your dealer.  
occur, such as internal electrical  
problem or file system error, etc.  
There is no applicable program.  
Failure of the built-in hard disk drive Consult your dealer.  
occur, such as internal electrical  
problem or file system error, etc.  
The HDD cannot be operated due to Hard disk drive can not run due to  
excessive heat. Please turn off power high temperature.  
immediately.  
Before using the system again,  
please change the location of the  
vehicle.  
Park your vehicle to safe place, turn  
the ignition switch off and wait until  
the temperature inside the vehicle  
drops.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages for Audio functions  
When problems occur in the audio source, a message may appears on the display. Refer to the table  
below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists, contact  
your dealer or your nearest PIONEER Service Center.  
Built-in DVD drive  
Message  
When  
What to do  
Unreadable disc.  
If you try to use a disc which is incom-  
patible with this system.  
Insert a suitable disc.  
If you insert a disc upside down.  
If the disc is dirty.  
Insert the disc with the label upward.  
Clean the disc.  
If the disc is cracked or otherwise dam- Insert a normal, round disc.  
aged.  
Mechanical failure of DVD drive occur.  
Electrical or mechanical error is occur.  
Consult your Pioneer dealer.  
Playback error.  
Please remove the disc.  
Press the RESET button. (“Hardware  
manual” after reading page 175 in this  
manual.)  
Region code error  
The disc does not have the same region Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing  
number as the navigation system. the correct region number.  
The temperature of built-in DVD drive is Park your vehicle to safe place, turn the  
Playback error due to irregu-  
lar temperature. Please  
remove the disc.  
out of the operating limits.  
ignition switch off and wait until the  
built-in DVD drive’s temperature returns  
to within normal operating limits.  
ATTENTION!  
Parking brake interlock is activated.  
Park your vehicle in the safe place and  
apply the parking brake.  
Viewing of front seat video  
source while driving is strictly  
prohibited.  
Parking brake interlock Page 18  
Search error  
If the title number, chapter number,  
Enter the available numbers or 10 key  
time, 10 key command, which you enter command or use another search  
in [10Key Search] are not exist. (This  
message will appear when DVD drive  
can not accept that command.)  
method.  
Hard disk drive (Music Library)  
Message  
When  
What to do  
This CD cannot be recorded If you insert a CD which prohibit second- Use another CD and retry.  
generation copies or duplicate.  
• Recording error.  
If recording can not be carried out with • Clean the disc and retry.  
Switching to CD playback skipping certain part of the disc continu- • Clean the pick-up lens with a commer-  
mode  
• Recording error.  
Recording is stopped  
ously because the disc is dirty,  
scratched, otherwise damaged, the pick-  
up lens of the DVD drive is dirty, or the  
cially available cleaning kit for DVD, then  
retry.  
• Retry in vibration-free condition.  
• The recording was unsta- extreme vibration occur continuously.  
ble. Restart the recording  
from the beginning of the  
track.  
Exceeded playlist maxi-  
mum. No more playlists can playlists are maximum number. (The  
be recorded.  
If you try to record a new CD but the  
Delete some playlist and retry.  
Consult your dealer.  
album playlist can be stores up to 400.)  
Playback error. Music  
Library cannot be played  
The music library component is abnor-  
mal.  
MyMix cannot store more  
than 99 tracks.  
If you try to add the tracks but the MyMix Delete some tracks and retry.  
playlists are maximum number. (The  
MyMix playlist can store the tracks up to  
99.)  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Message  
When  
What to do  
This track cannot be added The music library component is abnor-  
Consult your dealer.  
to MyMix  
mal.  
Name can not be used for  
voice recognition. Try again. been entered and the system can not  
convert it appropriate pronunciation.  
In case some invalid character have  
Enter the different characters so that the  
system can pronounce that.  
Single recording mode will Record the tracks other than the first  
When you set [Single] in [REC Mode], the  
only record the first track of track of CD when the recording mode is system only can record the first track of  
CD  
[Single].  
CD. Set [Auto] or [Manual] in [REC  
Mode] and retry. (Page 156)  
This CD cannot be recorded If you insert a CD which prohibit second- Use another CD and retry.  
generation copies or duplicate.  
HDD is full. This CD cannot There is no free space for recording in  
be recorded the hard disk drive.  
Unable to select appropriate Some corresponded data is found in  
Delete some tracks or playlist and try again  
if you want to record that CD.  
Enter the title manually, or try to retrieve  
the title by touching [Update title].  
®
Track info due to multiple  
entries in the database.  
Gracenote Database, the system can-  
not select one to append a title.  
All artist names in the playl- If you try to delete the artist name  
ist are deleted because no entirely. The artist will not be displayed  
character is entered. Do you in the artist group and artist name on  
If you enter the artist name again, the artist  
name appears.  
want to proceed?  
the information plate also will not be dis-  
played.  
Other sources  
Message  
When  
What to do  
Search failed.  
iPod is preparing playback.  
Therefore, the operation is invalid now.  
Wait until [Ready] disappear and try the  
operation.  
Invalid command - the  
memo has not been stored.  
• If you try to memorize 000 Channel to Tune the appropriate channel and memo-  
MyMix.  
rize that.  
• If you try to memorize the channel  
which is OFF AIR to MyMix.  
• If you try to memorize the channel to  
MyMix while the error of XM tuner  
occur.  
Invalid command - the CH  
has not been stored.  
• If you try to memorize 000 or 001 Chan- Tune the appropriate channel and memo-  
nel to TRFC button ’s preset.  
• If you try to memorize the channel  
which is OFF AIR to TRFC button ’s  
preset.  
rize that.  
• If you try to memorize the channel to  
TRFC button ’s preset while the error  
of XM tuner occur.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the hard disk drive is dis-  
connected  
Route Setting Information  
Route search specifications  
If there is no hard disk drive because of the repair  
or service, you can operate Radio source only  
without the hard disk drive.  
Your navigation system sets a route to your desti-  
nation by applying certain built-in rules to the  
map data. This section provides some useful  
information about how a route is set.  
• When a route is calculated, the route and  
voice guidance for the route is automati-  
cally set. Also, for day or time traffic regu-  
lations, only information about traffic  
regulations at the time when the route was  
calculated is shown. One-way streets and  
street closures may not be taken into con-  
sideration. For example, if a street is open  
during the morning only, but you arrive  
later, it would be against the traffic regula-  
tions so you cannot drive along the set  
route. When driving, please follow the  
actual traffic signs. Also, the system may  
not know some traffic regulations.  
Only following operation is available. Other func-  
tions can not operate.  
• Only FM, AM source can operate. (Preset sta-  
tion select and can not operate.)  
• If the selected source before ejecting the hard  
disk drive is [AV]. [AV input] source is avail-  
able on “Rear display”. (If the selected source  
is [DVD], nothing is output to “Rear display”. If  
the selected source is [MIRROR], Same  
image as “Front display” is output to “Rear dis-  
play”.)  
• Rear view camera is available only when the  
vehicle is backing up. ([Rear View] is not  
available.)  
• The calculated route is one example of the  
route to your destination decided by the navi-  
gation system whilst taking the type of streets  
or traffic regulations into account. It is not nec-  
essarily an optimum route. (In some cases, you  
may not be able to set the streets you want to  
pass. If you need to pass a certain street, set  
the waypoint on that street.)  
• The route set by your navigation system may  
not use the streets known to local drivers, such  
as small streets or special roads.  
• Some route options may become the same  
route. If waypoints are set, only one route is  
calculated.  
• If the destination is too far, there may be  
instances where the route cannot be set. (If  
you want to set a long-distance route going  
across several areas, set waypoints along the  
way.)  
• During voice guidance, turns and intersections  
from the freeway are announced. However, if  
you pass intersections, turns, and other guide  
points in rapid succession, some may not be  
announced.  
• It is possible that guidance may direct you off a  
freeway and then back on again.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• In some cases, the route may require you to  
travel in the opposite direction to your current  
heading. In such cases, you are instructed to  
turn around, so please turn around safely by  
following the actual traffic rules.  
Roads not used in calculations  
Even though displayed onscreen, the following  
roads are not included in route calculations.  
• Walkway  
• Public vehicle only  
• Non access road  
• In some cases, guidance may direct you past  
your destination and then indicate a U-turn to  
get back to it.  
Page 48  
• In some cases, a route may begin on the oppo-  
site side of a railway or river from your actual  
current location. If this happens, drive towards  
your destination for a while, and try route cal-  
culation again.  
Tracking  
• Your navigation system marks your course on  
the map in certain increments. This is called  
tracking. It is handy when you want to check a  
route traveled without guidance or if returning  
along a complex route.  
• When there is a traffic congestion or closure  
ahead, if driving through the traffic congestion  
or closure is better than taking the detour, a  
detour route may not appear.  
• There may be instances when the starting  
point and the destination point are not on the  
highlighted route.  
• The number of traffic circle exits displayed on  
the screen may differ from the actual number  
of roads.  
• A maximum of about 155 miles (250 km) is  
marked and, as you travel beyond this limit,  
tracking marks are erased in order from the  
most distant. Tracking display shows about  
100 miles tracking of your vehicle with white  
dots.  
Tracking can also be set for automatic erasing  
whenever the navigation system is switched  
Auto Reroute  
• Auto Reroute is used when you deviate more  
than 0.01 mi (Approx. 15m) from the route.  
• The Auto Reroute function does not work in the  
following cases:  
Displaying POI  
Points of Interest (POI) that can be displayed on  
the enlarged map of the intersection or [Driver’s  
View] (left screen) are only the special Points of  
Interest (POI) that contain the position informa-  
tion. Not all of Points of Interests (POI) are dis-  
played.  
- when your vehicle is not on a street  
- when you are too close to your destination  
- when your vehicle is on a ferry  
- when driving on a road inside a facility  
- when driving on a traffic circle  
- when driving on the routes are described in  
[Roads not used in calculations]  
Route highlighting  
• Once set, the route is highlighted in bright  
green or light blue on the map.  
• The immediate vicinity of your starting point  
and destination may not be highlighted, and  
neither will areas with particularly complex  
road layouts. Consequently, the route may  
appear to be cut off on the display, but voice  
guidance will continue.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DTS  
Glossary  
This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a sur-  
round system delivering multi-channel audio from up to  
6 independent channels.  
This glossary explains some of the terms used in  
the manual.  
3D Hybrid sensor  
The built-in sensor which enables the system to estimate  
your vehicle’s position. A learning function increases its  
accuracy and its learning data can be stored in memory.  
Favorite location  
A frequently visited location (such as your workplace or  
a relative’s home) that you can register to allow easy  
routing.  
Address Book  
A list of previously searched destinations, waypoints and  
locations registered manually.  
GPS  
Global Positioning System. A network of satellites that  
provides navigation signals for a variety of purposes.  
Aspect ratio  
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. A regular  
display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays  
have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture  
for exceptional presence and atmosphere.  
Gracenote® Music recognition service  
Music recognition technology and related data are pro-  
®
vided by Gracenote . Gracenote is the industry standard  
Bit rate  
in music recognition technology and related content  
delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.  
This expresses data volume per second, or bps units  
(bits per second). The higher the rate, the more informa-  
tion is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same  
encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the  
better the sound.  
Guidance mode  
The mode in which guidance is given as you drive to your  
destination; the system automatically switches to this  
mode as soon as a route has been set.  
Chapter  
DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are  
numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book.  
With DVD-Video discs featuring chapters, you can  
quickly find a desired scene with chapter search.  
Guidance point  
These are important landmarks along your route, gener-  
ally intersections. The next guidance point along your  
route is indicated on the map by the yellow flag icon.  
Current location  
The present location of your vehicle; your current loca-  
tion is shown on the map by a red triangle mark.  
Home location  
Your registered home location.  
ID3 tag  
Default setting  
This is a method of embedding track-related information  
in a MP3 file. This embedded information can include  
the track title, the artist’s name, the album title, the  
music genre, the year of production, comments and  
other data. The contents can be freely edited using soft-  
ware with ID3 Tag editing functions. Although the tags  
are restricted to the number of characters, the informa-  
tion can be viewed when the track is played back.  
A factory setting which applies when you first switch on  
the system; you can change default settings to suit your  
own needs in the Route Options menu or the Settings  
menu.  
Destination  
A location you choose as the end point of your journey.  
Dolby Digital  
ISO9660 format  
Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to  
5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby  
Digital surround sound system used in theaters.  
This is the international standard for the format logic of  
CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there  
are regulations for the following two levels.  
Level 1:  
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to  
8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-  
byte numerals and the [_] sign, with a file-extension of  
three characters.)  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Level 2:  
The file name can have up to 31 characters (including  
Multi-subtitle  
Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be recorded on a sin-  
gle DVD, letting you choose as desired.  
the separation mark [.] and a file extension). Each folder  
contains less than 8 hierarchies.  
Optical digital output  
Extended formats  
Joliet:  
By transmitting audio signals in a digital signal format,  
the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of  
transmission is minimized. An optical digital output is  
designed to transmit digital signals optically.  
File names can have up to 64 characters.  
Romeo:  
File names can have up to 128 characters.  
Packet write  
Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation  
This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is  
the signal recording system used for music CDs and  
DVDs. Generally, DVDs are recorded with higher sam-  
pling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs  
can provide higher sound quality.  
This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R,  
etc. at the time required for a file, just as is done with  
files on floppy or hard discs.  
Parental lock  
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-oriented  
scenes feature parental lock which prevents children  
from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you  
set the unit’s parental lock level, playback of scenes  
inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these  
scenes will be skipped.  
m3u  
Playlists created using the [WINAMP] software  
have a playlist file extension (.m3u).  
Menu  
A list of options shown on the display; choices are  
selected touching the display.  
Point of Interest (POI)  
Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations stored in  
the data, such as railway stations, shops, restaurants,  
and amusement parks.  
MP3  
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio com-  
pression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the  
ISO (International Standards Organization). MP3 is able  
to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a  
conventional disc.  
Region number  
DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indi-  
cating the area in which they were purchased. Playback  
of a DVD is not possible unless it features the same  
region number as the DVD player. The navigation sys-  
tem’s region number is displayed on the bottom of the  
display unit.  
MPEG  
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an  
international “Video image” compression standard.  
Some DVDs feature digital audio compressed and  
recorded using this system.  
Route setting  
The process of determining the ideal route to a specific  
location; route setting is done automatically by the sys-  
tem when you specify a destination.  
Multi-angle  
With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras  
are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images  
from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV.  
Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles,  
letting you choose your viewing angle as desired.  
Set route  
The route marked out by the system to your destination.  
It is highlighted in bright green on the map.  
Title  
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)  
DVD-Video discs have high data capacity, enabling  
recording of multiple movies on a single disc. If, for  
example, one disc contains three separate movies, they  
are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you  
enjoy the convenience of title search and other func-  
tions.  
Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multiple lan-  
guages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on  
a single disc, letting you choose as desired.  
Multi-session  
Multi-session is a recording method that allows addi-  
tional data to be recorded later. When recording data on  
a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from begin-  
ning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-  
session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions  
in one disc.  
Tracking  
Marks on the map indicating the route you have traveled.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV system (NTSC, PAL, SECAM)  
Different areas of the world use different TV systems.  
North America uses NTSC, Europe uses PAL and  
SECAM, and South America uses PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL  
and NTSC.  
Almost all are incompatible with each other. To display  
the video image, such as TV or DVD-video correctly, you  
may need to coordinate your system at the same TV sys-  
tem or use a multisystem equipment.  
VBR  
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking  
CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexi-  
bly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio  
compression, it is possible to achieve compression prior-  
ity sound quality.  
Voice guidance  
The giving of directions by a recorded voice while in  
guidance mode.  
Voice recognition  
The technology that allows the system to understand the  
driver’s voice commands.  
In order to operate the navigation system by voice,  
you need the microphone kit (CD-VC1), which is sold  
separately. Please refer to the [Owner’s Manual] for  
the microphone kit.  
Way Point  
A location that you choose to visit before your destina-  
tion; a journey can be built up from multiple waypoints  
and the destination.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Information  
Navigation menu  
Destination menu  
Information menu  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Map menu  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting menu  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shortcut menu  
The shortcuts displayed on screen can be changed. The shortcuts described here are those that can  
be selected with the system as default setting.  
Items marked with an asterisk (*) can not be removed from the shortcut menu.  
Changing a shortcut Page 47  
Shortcut menu  
: Destination*  
: Route Options*  
: Registration  
: Vicinity Search  
: Overlay POI  
: Volume  
Route Condition  
Avoid Toll Road  
Avoid Ferry  
Avoid Freeway  
Learning Route  
: Phone book  
: Dial Favorite 1 to 5  
: Whole Route Overview  
: Stock Info  
: Browse  
: My Favorites  
: Traffic On Route  
: Traffic Events  
: Day/Night Display  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu in the Audio Screen  
Audio Settings menu  
System Settings menu (Page 1)  
System Settings menu (Page 2)  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU, TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.  
TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium  
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936  
TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia  
TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada  
TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso  
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000  
TEL:55-9178-4270  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2006 by Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
Printed in Japan  
<CRB2184-A> UC  
<KYGHF> <06B00001>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Philips Air Cleaner AC4053 User Manual
Philips Electric Shaver 4605X User Manual
Philips Hearing Aid ZA312B6A User Manual
Philips Home Theater System HTS3569 98 User Manual
Philips Thermometer SCH530 86 User Manual
Polycom IP Phone 1725 44327 001 User Manual
Poulan Lawn Mower 177167 User Manual
Poulan Snow Blower 422088 User Manual
Poulan Snow Blower 435551 User Manual
Power Acoustik Car Video System HD 7BG User Manual